0% found this document useful (0 votes)

340 views

B.tech (Ee Ec Ei MCTR)

Uploaded by

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

340 views

B.tech (Ee Ec Ei MCTR)

Uploaded by

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 239

BANASTHALI VIDYAPITH

Bachelor of Technology
(Electronics and Instrumentation /
Electrical and Electronics /
Mechatronics /
Electronics and Communication)

Curriculum Structure

First Semester Examination, December, 2019

Second Semester Examination, April/May, 2020
Third Semester Examination, December, 2020
Fourth Semester Examination, April/May, 2021
Fifth Semester Examination, December, 2021
Sixth Semester Examination, April/May, 2022
Seventh Semester Examination, December, 2022
Eighth Semester Examination, April/May, 2023

BANASTHALI VIDYAPITH
P.O. BANASTHALI VIDYAPITH
(Rajasthan)-304022

July, 2019 70
2

No. F. 9-6/81-U.3
Government of India
Ministry of Education and Culture
(Department of Education)

New Delhi, the 25th October, 1983

NOTIFICATION

In exercise of the powers conferred by Section 3 of the University

Grants Commission Act, 1956 (3 of 1956) the Central Government,
on the advice of the Commission, hereby declare that Banasthali
Vidyapith, P. O. Banasthali Vidyapith, (Rajasthan) shall be deemed
to be a University for the purpose of the aforesaid Act.

Sd/-
(M. R. Kolhatkar)
Joint Secretary of the Government of India

NOTICE

Changes in Bye-laws/Syllabi and Books may from time to time be

made by amendment or remaking, and a Candidate shall, except in
so far as the Vidyapith determines otherwise, comply with any
change that applies to years she has not completed at the time of
change.

CONTENTS
Sr.No. Curriculum Structure Page No.
Bachelor of Technology (Electronics and
1. 22
Instrumentation Engineering)
Bachelor of Technology (Electrical and Electronics
2. 29
Engineering)
3. Bachelor of Technology (Mechatronics) 36
Bachelor of Technology (Electronics and
4. 43
Communication Engineering)

Sr.No. Course Name Page No.

Core Paper
1 Calculus 52
2 Linear Algebra 53
3 Applied Optics 55
4 Modern Physics 57
5 Chemistry 58
6 Biology 61
7 Thermodynamics 63
8 Engineering Mechanics 65
9 Computer Fundamentals and Programming 66
10 Computer Fundamentals and Programming Lab 68
11 Electrical Engineering 70
12 Electrical Engineering Lab 72
13 Engineering Drawing and Graphics Lab 73
14 Measurement Techniques Lab 74
15 Complex Variables 75
16 Differential Equations 77
4

17 Structure and Properties of Materials 78

18 Basic Electronics 80
19 Data Structures 81
20 Data Structures Lab 83
21 Object Oriented Programming 84
22 Object Oriented Programming Lab 86
23 Network Analysis and Synthesis 86
24 Network Analysis and Synthesis Lab 88
25 Digital Electronics 89
26 Digital Electronics Lab 91
27 Electrical and Electronics Measurements 92
28 Electrical and Electronics Measurements Lab 94-95
29 Pneumatic Engineering 96
30 Pneumatic Engineering Lab 98
31 Electromagnetic Field Theory 99
32 Electrical Machine-I 100
33 Electrical Machine-I Lab 102
34 Signals, Systems and Networks 103
35 Seminar (EC) 105
36 Semiconductor Devices and Circuits 105
37 Semiconductor Devices and Circuits Lab 107
38 Fundamentals of Economics 108
39 Principles of Management 109
40 Numerical Methods 111
41 Probability and Statistical Methods 112
42 Analog Integrated Circuits 114
5

43 Analog Integrated Circuits Lab 116

44 Microprocessor and Microcontroller 117
45 Microprocessor and Microcontroller Lab 119
46 Industrial Instrumentation 120
47 Industrial Instrumentation Lab 122
48 Linear Control System 124
49 Linear Control System Lab 126
50 Robotics and Control 127
51 Robotics and Control Lab 129
52 Power Electronics 130
53 Power Electronics Lab 132
54 Industrial Automation 132
55 Industrial Automation Lab 134
56 Power System-I 135
57 Power System-I Lab 137
58 Electrical Machines-II 138
59 Electrical Machines-II Lab 140
60 Power System-II 141
61 Power System-II Lab 143
62 Hydraulics Engineering 144
63 Hydraulics Engineering Lab 147
64 Analog Electronics 148
65 Analog Electronics Lab 149
66 Analog Communication 150
67 Analog Communication Lab 152
68 Control Systems 153
6

69 Control Systems Lab 154

70 Digital Communication 155
71 Digital Communication Lab 156
72 Microwave Engineering 157
73 Microwave Engineering Lab 159
74 Process Control 160
75 Process Control Lab 162
76 Communication Engineering 163
77 Mechatronics Systems 165
78 Mechatronics Systems Lab 166
89 Digital Signal Processing 167
80 Digital Signal Processing Lab 169
81 Switch Gear and Protection 170
82 Switch Gear and Protection Lab 172
83 Computer Integrated Manufacturing System 173
84 Computer Integrated Manufacturing System Lab 175
85 Antenna Analysis 176
86 Antenna Analysis Lab 178
87 Fiber Optics and Communication 179
88 Fiber Optics and Communication Lab 180
89 VLSI Design 180
90 VLSI Design Lab 182
91 Communication Networks 183
Discipline Electives
92 Artificial Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic 186
93 Energy Efficiency and Conservation 188
7

94 Non-linear Control system 189

95 Digital Control Systems 191
96 Analytical Instrumentation 193
97 Fiber Optic and Laser Instrumentation 195
98 Biomedical Instrumentation 196
99 Virtual Instrumentation 198
100 Power Plant Engineering 200
101 Electric Drives and Control 201
102 Electric Drives and Control Lab 203
103 Mechatronics 204
104 Mechatronics Lab 206
105 Robotics and Automation 206
106 Robotics and Automation Lab 208
107 Power System Operation and Control 209
108 Power System Operation and Control Lab 211
109 Power System Restructuring and Deregulation 212
110 Power System Restructuring and Deregulation Lab 214
111 Operation Research 214
112 Industrial Engineering 216
113 Manufacturing Science 217
114 Production Technology 219
115 Analytical Instrumentation 221
116 Optical Network 222
117 Satellite Communication 224
118 Basics of Nano electronics 226
119 Mobile Communication 227
8

120 Radar Navigation 229

121 Geoinformatics 230
122 Audio and Video Systems 232
Reading Electives
123. Electromagnetic Compatibility 234
124. Electronic Packaging 234
125. Multimedia Compression and Communication 235
126. Professional Ethics 235
127. Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks 236
128. Electric Vehicles 236
129. IoT Sensors and Devices 237
130. Introduction to Photonics 238
131. Fundamentals of Semiconductor devices 238
132. Advanced IOT Applications 238
133. Principles of Signals and Systems 238
134. Biomedical Signal Processing 238
135. Electromagnetic Waves in guided and wireless media 238
136. Control Engineering 238
137. Industrial Automation and Control 238
Mathematical Methods and techniques in signal
138. 238
processing
Electronics Modules for Industrial Applications using
139. 238
Opamps
140. Chemical Process Instrumentation 238
141. Quality Control 238
142. Interfacing with Arduino 238
143. Robotica 238
144. Analyzing Data with Python 238
145. Industry 4.0 238
9

146. Internet of Things 238

147. Industrial Robotics 238
148. SCADA 239
149. PLC 239
150. Antennas 239
151. Computer Aided Power System Analysis 239
152. Power System Dynamics, Control and Monitoring 239
153. Advance Power Electronics and Control 239
154. Advances in UHV Transmission & Distribution 239
Electronics Modules for industrial applications using
155. 239
opamp
156. CNC Machining Turning 239
157. Autocad 239
158. Solar PV Technology 239
10

Department of Automation
Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
The Bachelor of Technology (B.Tech.) program in Electronics and
Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) has a strong blend of Measurement,
Control and Automation. The program deals with control and monitoring of
sophisticated real world problems. This branch has scope of Electronic
Measurement, Process Control, Robotics, Automation, Control System
Design and Optimization. The program was started in 2011 and progressing
on high growth path with best practices focusing on student centric
approach. The department is a blend of dynamic and well experienced
faculties. The main aim of this programme is to transform the student into
professionally competent and socially sensitive engineers capable of
working in multicultural global environment through quality education in
the field of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering.
The aim of this programme is to enhance learning and research spirit in the
students by making them acquaintance with modern technologies in
Electronics and Instrumentation to operate the growing needs of the
industries. The motive is to inculcate continuous practical knowledge
through skill based learning approach using team works and leadership
qualities. The course will bestow students, the capability to provide cost
effectiveness solutions for social needs with deliberation surrounding.
Program Educational Objectives
• To acquaint technical skills in the students for designing engineering
systems by using instrumentation and related field of electronics.
• To create professional abilities that nurtures them for new employment
opportunities in advanced areas of Electronics and Instrumentation as
well as Electronics Engineering.
• To adorn with skills for solving technical problems related to Robotics,
Embedded system, Biomedical, Fiber Optics, Digital Control system,
Virtual Instrumentation, Analytic Instrumentation, Process control.
• To develop overall personality having attributes of ethical and moral
values using women empowerment, humanities, and sociological
courses.
11

Program Outcomes
A graduate in Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering will be able to: -
PO 1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics,
science, engineering fundamentals, and an engineering
specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.
PO 2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature,
and analyze complex engineering problems reaching substantiated
conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences,
and engineering sciences.
PO 3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex
engineering problems and design system components or processes
that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the
public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
PO 4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-
based knowledge and research methods including design of
experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of
the information to provide valid conclusions.
PO 5. Modern tool usage: Demonstrate their technical ability to design
and analyze Electronics and Instrumentation circuits, computer
based programs through Programmable Logic Controller (PLC),
MATLAB, Lab-VIEW, AUTOCAD and Arduino and IOT.
PO 6. The Engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the
contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and
cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice.
PO 7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the
professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental
contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for
sustainable development.
PO 8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics
and responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.
PO 9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual,
and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in
multidisciplinary settings.
12

PO 10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex

engineering activities with the engineering community and with
society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective
presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.
PO 11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and
understanding of the engineering and management principles and
apply these to one's own work, as a member and leader in a team,
to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO 12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the
preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
PO 13. Self learning and entrepreneurship: Graduate will be able to
participate and succeed in campus placements and competitive
examinations like Public sector, GATE, GRE etc. An
understanding of the industry needs through direct exposure with
the industries under the Entrepreneurship Development Cell.
PO 14. Higher education and research: An ability to take interest in
higher education, research avenues through various trainings and
research laboratory exposure.
13

Electrical and Electronics Engineering

Electrical and Electronics Engineering is a professional
engineering discipline that deals with the development of technologies for
generating and harnessing electricity for a wide range of applications. The
field first became an identifiable occupation in the late nineteenth century,
with the commercialization of the electric telegraph and power supply.
The field now covers a range of sub disciplines, including those that deal
with power, control systems, electronics, signal processing and
telecommunications.
Electrical engineering surrounds us everywhere in modern society.
The electrical engineer supplies us with the ability to harness electricity
which has transformed our lives. It gives us light, heat, entertainment,
communication systems and comfort. Electrical engineers create and design
products and information systems using scientific principles combined with
natural curiosity, problem-solving and innovation.
Electrical engineers work with electricity in a variety of areas -
aircraft and automobiles; broadcasting and communications systems;
lighting and wiring in buildings; machinery controls; power generating and
transmitting; radar and navigation systems. They can be involved with the
design of new products as well as testing equipment and solving problem
Electrical engineering program offer high quality education to
students for abreast of latest global industrial and research requirements and
fulfill responsibility towards community. The motive of the course is to
transform students into professionally competent and socially sensitive
engineers capable of working in multicultural global environment through
quality education in the field of Electrical and Electronics Engineering.

Program Educational Objective

• To prepare undergraduate students with appropriate blend of theoretical
foundations, experimentation & technical implementation to
comprehend and pinpoint problems in the field of electrical
engineering.
• To offer students with a solid foundation in mathematical, scientific
and engineering fundamentals required to solve electrical engineering
problems and also to pursue higher studies. Student will be able to
14

employ her knowledge along with essential techniques & tools for
modern engineering applications.
• To train students with good scientific and electrical engineering
breadth so as to comprehend, analyze, design, and create novel
products and solutions for the real life problems in the present
electrical system.
• To inculcate professional and ethical attitude and skills like
communication, teamwork, computational ability to relate electrical
engineering issues to broader social context in students.
• To educate students with an academic environment aware of
excellence, leadership, and the life-long learning needed for a
successful professional career through independent studies, thesis,
internships, etc.

Program Outcomes
A graduate in Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering will be able to: -
PO 1. Engineering knowledge: Graduates will demonstrate knowledge
of advanced mathematics, science and electrical engineering with
the ability to apply the theoretical knowledge and concepts to the
disciplines of electrical engineering.
PO 2. Problem analysis: Graduates will demonstrate an ability to
identify, formulate, pinpoint and solve Electrical engineering
problems keeping in view the present day power and energy
requirement and its future prospect.
PO 3. Design/development of solutions: Graduate will demonstrate an
ability to design and analyze electrical and power electronic
circuits and conduct experiments enable to design, construct and
operate complex interconnected power systems.
PO 4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Graduates will
demonstrate an ability to design study and analyze the digital and
analog systems and components that serve as the fundamental
components of the power engineering methods being increasingly
used with the new technological advances.
PO 5. Environment and sustainability: Graduates will demonstrate an
ability to visualize and work on laboratory and identify the
15

theoretical models as predictors of real world behavior. This may

include evaluating, establishing of validating a relationship
between data and underlying physical principles.
PO 6. Modern tool usage: Graduate will demonstrate skills to use
modern engineering tools, software, equipment to design, protect
or assemble the system using specific methodologies with the help
of appropriate tools to satisfy requirements. Graduates will
demonstrate knowledge of professional and computer language
skills that will eventually develop them into skilled researchers in
an atmosphere that is technically advanced and conductive.
PO 7. Communication: Graduate will be able to communicate
effectively in both verbal and written form. They will develop a
better presentation skill on academic and personal grounds that
will enhance their personality in all aspects.
PO 8. The engineer and society: Graduate will understand the impact of
engineering solutions on the society and also be aware of
contemporary issues relating to the exhausting resources and
alternatives to continue uninterrupted power supply.
PO 9. Individual and team work: Graduate will develop confidence,
self-motivation, positive belief, consistency, perseverance and
team work.
PO 10. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and
understanding of the engineering and management principles and
apply these to one's own work, as a member and leader in a team,
to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO 11. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the
preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
PO 12. Self learning and entrepreneurship: Graduate will be able to
participate and succeed in campus placements and competitive
examinations like Public sector, GATE, GRE etc. An
understanding of the industry needs through direct exposure with
the industries under the Entrepreneurship Development Cell.
PO 13. Higher education and research: An ability to take interest in
higher education, research avenues through various trainings and
research laboratory exposure.
16

Mechatronics Engineering
Automation is playing an important role in the field of engineering day by
day by improving efficiency and providing faster outputs. Automation
comprises essence of Electronics, Electrical, Instrumentation, Information
Technology and Mechanical Engineering which contribute together to
automate any system. That is why Mechatronics Engineering was
inherently introduced. The concept behind the Mechatronics Engineering
was to produce a design solution that unifies each of these various
subfields. This branch invests in the creation and implementation of smart
devices, machines, processes and systems. The often-expressed desire to be
at the forefront of a high-tech, knowledge-based economy opens plenty of
career options that require diverse, multi-skilled graduates.
Hence it opens up opportunities for Mechatronics Engineering graduates to
work in companies of all sizes and fields – from start-ups to multinational
corporations, in areas from research to high-value manufacturing.
The Mechatronics Engineering impart high quality engineering education
that combines academics with extensive practical experience and prepares
our engineers for leadership in industry, business, academia and
government.
Programme Educational Objectives
• To offer industry oriented courses like pneumatics, Hydraulics,
Computer Integrated Manufacturing, Programmable Logic Controller
etc.
• To acquaint technical skills in the students for designing engineering
systems by using concepts of electrical, electronics, Mechanical and
Information Technology.
• To create professional abilities that nurtures them for new employment
opportunities in advanced areas of Mechatronics Engineering.
• To develop overall personality having attributes of ethical and moral
values using women empowerment, humanities, and sociological
courses.
• To impart training to enable the students to solve the real time
problems related to the field of Mechatronics Engineering and allied
areas demanded by the industry and society.
17

Programme Outcomes
A graduate in Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering will be able to: -
PO 1. Engineering Knowledge: Understand and apply the recent
technological developments in Engineering to develop products to
cater to the Societal & industrial needs.
PO 2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature,
and analyze complex engineering problems reaching substantiated
conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences,
and engineering sciences.
PO 3. Design/development of solutions: Design & develop solutions for
complex problems in the entire spectrum of automation
technology.
PO 4. Design/development of solutions: Think critically, follow
innovations and developments in science and technology,
demonstrate personal and organizational entrepreneurship and
engage in life-long learning in various subjects.
PO 5. Individual and Team: Take individual and team responsibility,
function effectively and respectively as an individual and a
member or a leader of a team; and have the skills to work
effectively in multi-disciplinary teams.
PO 6. Modern tool usage: Demonstrate their technical ability to design
and analyze Electronics and Instrumentation circuits, computer
based programs through Programmable Logic Controller (PLC),
MATLAB, Lab-VIEW, AUTOCAD and Arduino and IOT.
PO 7. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-
based knowledge and research methods including design of
experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of
the information to provide valid conclusions.
PO 8. Life Long Learning: Recognize the need for and have the
preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
PO 9. The Engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the
contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and
cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice.
PO 10. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the
professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental
18

contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for

sustainable development.
PO 11. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics
and responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.
PO 12. Self learning and entrepreneurship: Graduate will be able to
participate and succeed in campus placements and competitive
examinations like Public sector, GATE, GRE etc. An
understanding of the industry needs through direct exposure with
the industries under the Entrepreneurship Development Cell.
PO 13. Higher education and research: An ability to take interest in
higher education, research avenues through various trainings and
research laboratory exposure.
19

Electronics and Communication Engineering

Programme Educational Objectives
The B.Tech. (ECE) programme aims for the holistic development of
students through the unique and innovative fivefold educational ideology of
Banasthali Vidyapith. Electronics now become the integral part of our lives.
As the world continues to rely on Electronics technology, there is a great
requirement for those engineers who are able to design, create, and maintain
the many products and systems that support electronics technology.
Electronics engineers develop innovative technology solutions in a wide
range of areas from handheld communications to solar panels; from cardiac
pacemakers to autonomous robots; from wireless networks to bio-
engineered sensors that detect dangerous pathogens; and intelligent
surveillance systems that perform face and motion recognition.

The program aims to deepen the knowledge and skills of the students on the
basic concepts and theories that will equip them in their professional work
involving analysis, systems implementation, operation, production, and
maintenance of the various applications in the field of Electronics and
Communications. The curriculum is designed in a way that it will equip
students with a solid grasp of mathematical, scientific, and engineering
concepts, through classroom education and laboratory exercises. Graduates
of the program are expected to develop and use professional skills that
facilitate their continued carrier growth well beyond their graduation.

The main objectives of the program are:

• To provide students solid foundation in mathematical and engineering

fundamentals required to solve engineering problems and also to
pursue advanced studies. This serves them lifelong in their professional
___domain as well as higher education.
• To develop an ability to integrate fundamental knowledge of basic
science, mathematics and engineering to work on complex problems in
the field of Electronics and Communication.
• To prepare engineers to work in inter-disciplinary environment, either
independently or in a team, and demonstrate leadership qualities.
• Practice the ethics of their profession, consistent with a sense of social
responsibility and develop their engineering design, problem–solving
20

skills and aptitude for innovations as they work individually and in

multi-disciplinary teams.
• Inculcate a lifelong learning culture.
• To formulate problems and projects and to plan a process for solution.
• Communicate effectively and manage resources skilfully as members
and leaders of the profession.
• To prepare competent engineers at various national and international
levels.
Programme Outcomes
PO1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics,
science, engineering fundamentals, and Electronics engineering to
the solution of complex engineering problems.
PO2. Problem analysis: Review, Identify, formulate, research
literature, and analyze complex engineering problems reaching
substantiated conclusions using principles of mathematics, natural
sciences, and engineering sciences.
PO3. Design/development of solutions: Develop solutions for complex
engineering problems and design system components/processes
that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the
public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
PO4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use scientific and
engineering knowledge and research methods including design of
experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of
the information to provide valid conclusions.
PO5. Modern tool usage: Apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering tools including MATLAB, LabView, Proteus,
VHDL, Arduino and related hardware to complex engineering
activities with an understanding of the limitations.
PO6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning gained by the
contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and
cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice.
PO7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the
professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental
21

contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge for sustainable

development.
PO8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics
responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.
PO9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual,
and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in
multidisciplinary surroundings.
PO10. Communication Skill: Communicate effectively on complex
engineering activities with the engineering community and with
society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective
presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.
PO11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and
understanding of the engineering and management principles and
apply as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in
multidisciplinary environments.
PO12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the
preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
22

Curriculum Structure
Bachelor of Technology (Electronics and Instrumentation
Engineering)

First Year
Semester - I
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
BVF 011/ General English / lkekU; fgUnh 2 0 0 2
BVF 014
Core Foundation Course - I 2 0 0 2
MATH 103/ Calculus/Linear Algebra 3 1 0 4
MATH 107
PHY 101/ Applied Optics/Modern Physics 3 1 0 4
PHY 106
CHEM 101/ Chemistry/Biology 3 1 0 4
BIO 101
CHE 102/ Thermodynamics/Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 4
PHY 109
CS 109/ Computer Fundamentals and 4 0 0 4
EEE 101 Programming/Electrical Engineering
CS 109L/ Computer Fundamentals and Programming 0 0 4 2
EEE 101L Lab /Electrical Engineering Lab
ENGG 101L/ Engineering Drawing and Graphics Lab/ 0 0 6 3
ENGG 103L Measurement Techniques Lab
Semester Total: 20 4 10 29

Semester - II
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
BVF 014/ lkekU; fgUnh /General English 2 0 0 2
BVF 011
Core Foundation Course - II 2 0 0 2
MATH 107/ Linear Algebra/Calculus 3 1 0 4
MATH 103
PHY 106/ Modern Physics/Applied Optics 3 1 0 4
PHY 101
BIO 101/ Biology/Chemistry 3 1 0 4
CHEM 101
PHY 109/ Engineering Mechanics/Thermodynamics 3 1 0 4
CHE 102
EEE 101/ Electrical Engineering / Computer 4 0 0 4
CS 109 Fundamentals and Programming
EEE 101L/ Electrical Engineering Lab / Computer 0 0 4 2
CS 109L Fundamentals and Programming Lab
ENGG 103L/ Measurement Techniques Lab /Engineering 0 0 6 3
ENGG 101L Drawing and Graphics Lab
Semester Total: 20 4 10 29
23

Second Year
Semester - III
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Core Foundation Course - III 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - I 2 0 0 2
MATH 209/ Complex Variables/Differential Equations 3 1 0 4
MATH 210
ENGG 201/ Structure and Properties of Materials/Basic 4 0 0 4
ENGG 202 Electronics
CS 209 Data Structures 4 0 0 4
CS 209L Data Structures Lab 0 0 4 2
EEE 203 Network Analysis and Synthesis 3 1 0 4
EEE 203L Network Analysis and Synthesis Lab 0 0 2 1
ELE 206 Digital Electronics 3 1 0 4
ELE 201L Digital Electronics Lab 0 0 2 1
EIE 203S Seminar 0 0 2 1
Semester Total: 21 3 10 29

Semester - IV
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Core Foundation Course - IV 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - II 2 0 0 2
MATH 210/ Differential Equations/Complex Variables 3 1 0 4
MATH 209
ENGG 202/ Basic Electronics/Structure and Properties 4 0 0 4
ENGG 201 of Materials
CS 214 Object Oriented Programming 4 0 0 4
CS 214L Object Oriented Programming Lab 0 0 4 2
EIE 204 Electrical and Electronics Measurements 4 0 0 4
EIE 202L Electrical and Electronics Measurements 0 0 2 1
Lab
MCTR 201 Pneumatic Engineering 4 0 0 4
MCTR 201L Pneumatic Engineering Lab 0 0 2 1
Semester Total: 23 1 8 28
24

Third Year
Semester - V
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Vocational Course - I 2 0 0 2
Core Foundation Course - V/Elective
2 0 0 2
Foundation Course - III
ECO 307/ Fundamentals of Economics/Principles of
3 0 0 3
MGMT 310 Management
STAT 204/ Probability and Statistical
3 1 0 4
MATH 311 Methods/Numerical Methods
ELE 311 Analog Integrated Circuits 3 1 0 4
ELE 301L Analog Integrated Circuits Lab 0 0 2 1
ELE 509 Microprocessors & Microcontrollers 4 0 0 4
ELE 306L Microprocessors & Microcontrollers Lab 0 0 2 1
EIE 308 Industrial Instrumentation 4 0 0 4
EIE 308L Industrial Instrumentation Lab 0 0 2 1
EIE 309 Linear Control System 3 1 0 4
EIE 309L Linear Control System Lab 0 0 2 1
Semester Total: 24 3 8 31

Semester - VI
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Vocational Course - II 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - III/Core 2 0 0 2
Foundation Course - V
MGMT 310/ Principles of Management/Fundamentals 3 0 0 3
ECO 307 of Economics
MATH 311/ Numerical Methods/Probability and 3 1 0 4
STAT 204 Statistical Methods
MCTR 305 Robotics and Control 4 0 0 4
MCTR 305L Robotics and Control Lab 0 0 2 1
EEE 308 Power Electronics 3 1 0 4
EEE 304L Power Electronics Lab 0 0 2 1
EIE 307 Industrial Automation 4 0 0 4
EIE 307L Industrial Automation Lab 0 0 2 1
EIE 312P Project 0 0 4 2
Semester Total: 21 2 10 28
25

Fourth Year
Semester - VII
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
EIE 310 Process Control 4 0 0 4
EIE 310L Process Control Lab 0 0 2 1
ECE 411 Communication Engineering 4 0 0 4
MCTR 419 Mechatronics Systems 4 0 0 4
MCTR 419L Mechatronics Systems Lab 0 0 4 2
ELE 410 Digital Signal Processing 3 1 0 4
ELE 304L Digital Signal Processing Lab 0 0 2 1
Discipline Elective 4 0 0 4
Open Elective 4 0 0 4
Semester Total: 23 1 8 28

Semester - VIII
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
EIE 419P UIL Project 0 0 48 24
Reading Elective 0 0 0 2
Semester Total: 0 0 48 26

List of Discipline Elective

Course Code Course Name L T P C*
EIE 408 Artificial Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic 4 0 0 4
EEE 402 Energy Efficiency and Conservation 4 0 0 4
EIE 415 Non-linear Control system 4 0 0 4
EIE 402 Digital Control Systems 4 0 0 4
EIE 401 Analytical Instrumentation 4 0 0 4
EIE 413 Fiber Optic and Laser Instrumentation 4 0 0 4
EIE 301 Biomedical Instrumentation 4 0 0 4
EIE 306 Virtual Instrumentation 4 0 0 4
EIE 417 Power Plant Engineering 4 0 0 4
26

List of Reading Electives

Introduction to Photonics
Fundamentals of Semiconductor devices
Advanced IOT Applications
Principles of Signals and Systems
Biomedical Signal Processing
Electromagnetic Waves in guided and wireless media
Control Engineering
Industrial Automation and Control
Mathematical Methods and techniques in signal processing

Electronics Modules for Industrial Applications using Opamps

Chemical Process Instrumentation
Quality Control
Interfacing with Arduino
Robotica
Analyzing Data with Python
Industry 4.0
Internet of Things
Industrial Robotics
SCADA
PLC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Antennas
27

List of Core Foundation Course

Course
Course Name L T P C*
Code
BVF 002 Environment Studies 2 0 0 2
BVF 013 Indian Cultural Heritage 2 0 0 2
BVF 017 Selected Writings of Great Authors - I 2 0 0 2
BVF 020 Women in Indian Society 2 0 0 2
BVF 015 Parenthood and Family Relation 2 0 0 2

List of Elective Foundation Course

Course
Course Name L T P C*
Code
BVF 016 Science of Happiness 2 0 0 2
BVF 012 Human Body and Health 2 0 0 2
BVF 010 Design Thinking 2 0 0 2
BVF 019 Universal Human Values 2 0 0 2
BVF 018 Selected Writings of Great Authors - II 2 0 0 2

List of Vocational Courses

Course
Course Name L T P C*
Code
VOC 011L Basic Dress Making 0 0 4 2
VOC 005L Dress Designing 0 0 4 2
VOC 014 Entrepreneurship - I 2 0 0 2
VOC 015 Entrepreneurship - II 2 0 0 2
VOC 020 Radio Production - I 2 0 0 2
VOC 021 Radio Production - II 2 0 0 2
VOC 022 Web Designing and Internet Technology-I 1 0 0 1
VOC 022L Web Designing and Internet 0 0 2 1
Technology-I Lab
VOC 023 Web Designing and Internet Technology-II 1 0 0 1
VOC 023L Web Designing and Internet 0 0 2 1
Technology-II Lab
VOC 009 Library Science - I 1 0 0 1
VOC 009L Library Science – I Lab 0 0 2 1
VOC 010 Library Science – II 1 0 0 1
VOC 010L Library Science – II Lab 0 0 2 1
VOC 018 Photography - I 0 0 4 2
VOC 019 Photography - II 0 0 4 2
28

VOC 016 Introduction to Artificial Intelligence - I 2 0 0 2

VOC 023 Introduction to Artificial Intelligence - II 2 0 0 2
VOC 012 Computer Assisted Learning and Teaching 1 0 0 1
VOC 012L Computer Assisted Learning and 0 0 2 1
Teaching Lab
VOC 013 Emerging Technologies for Learning and 2 0 0 2
Teaching

Student can opt for at most 2 additional Open (Generic) audit/credit

Elective from other disciplines opting at most 1 per semester from
Semesters III onwards with prior permission of respective heads and
time table Permitting.

Every Student shall also opt for:

Five Fold Education: Physical Education I, Physical Education II,
Five Fold Education: Aesthetic Education I, Aesthetic Education II,
Five Fold Education: Practical Education I, Practical Education II
one each semester

* L - Lecture hrs/week ; T - Tutorial hrs/week;

P - Project/Practical/Lab/All other non-classroom academic
activities, etc. hrs/week; C- Credit Points of the Course

Note: Syllabus of Foundation and Vocational courses are available in

separate booklet, Curriculum Structure and Syllabus Foundation
and Vocational Courses.
29

Curriculum Structure
Bachelor of Technology (Electrical and Electronics Engineering)

First Year
Semester - I
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
General English / lkekU; fgUnh 2 0 0 2
Core Foundation Course - I 2 0 0 2
MATH 103/ Calculus/Linear Algebra 3 1 0 4
MATH 107
PHY 101/ Applied Optics/Modern Physics 3 1 0 4
PHY 106
CHEM 101/ Chemistry/Biology 3 1 0 4
BIO 101
CHE 102/ Thermodynamics/Engineering 3 1 0 4
PHY 109 Mechanics
CS 109/ Computer Fundamentals and 4 0 0 4
EEE 101 Programming/Electrical Engineering
CS 109L/ Computer Fundamentals and 0 0 4 2
EEE 101L Programming Lab /Electrical
Engineering Lab
ENGG 101L/ Engineering Drawing and Graphics Lab/ 0 0 6 3
ENGG 103L Measurement Techniques Lab
Semester Total: 20 4 10 29

Semester - II
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
lkekU; fgUnh /General English 2 0 0 2
Core Foundation Course - II 2 0 0 2
MATH 107/ Linear Algebra/Calculus
3 1 0 4
MATH 103
PHY 106/ Modern Physics/Applied Optics
3 1 0 4
PHY 101
BIO 101/ Biology/Chemistry
3 1 0 4
CHEM 101
PHY 109/ Engineering
3 1 0 4
CHE 102 Mechanics/Thermodynamics
EEE 101/ Electrical Engineering / Computer
4 0 0 4
CS 109 Fundamentals and Programming
EEE 101L/ Electrical Engineering Lab / Computer
0 0 4 2
CS 109L Fundamentals and Programming Lab
ENGG 103L/ Measurement Techniques Lab
0 0 6 3
ENGG 101L /Engineering Drawing and Graphics Lab
Semester Total: 20 4 10 29
30

Second Year
Semester - III
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Core Foundation Course - III 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - I 2 0 0 2
MATH 209/ Complex Variables/Differential 3 1 0 4
MATH 210 Equations
ENGG 201/ Structure and Properties of 4 0 0 4
ENGG 202 Materials/Basic Electronics
CS 209 Data Structures 4 0 0 4
CS 209L Data Structures Lab 0 0 4 2
ELE 202 Electromagnetic Field Theory 4 0 0 4
ELE 206 Digital Electronics 3 1 0 4
ELE 201L Digital Electronics Lab 0 0 2 1
EEE 204S Seminar 0 0 2 1
Semester Total: 22 2 8 28

Semester - IV
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Core Foundation Course - IV 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - II 2 0 0 2
MATH 210/ Differential Equations/Complex 3 1 0 4
MATH 209 Variables
ENGG 202/ Basic Electronics/Structure and 4 0 0 4
ENGG 201 Properties of Materials
CS 214 Object Oriented Programming 4 0 0 4
CS 214L Object Oriented Programming Lab 0 0 4 2
EIE 204 Electrical and Electronics 4 0 0 4
Measurements
EIE 202L Electrical and Electronics 0 0 2 1
Measurements Lab
EEE 203 Network Analysis and Synthesis 3 1 0 4
EEE 203L Network Analysis and Synthesis Lab 0 0 2 1
Semester Total: 22 2 8 28
31

Third Year
Semester - V
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Vocational Course - I 2 0 0 2
Core Foundation Course - V/Elective
2 0 0 2
Foundation Course - III
ECO 307/ Fundamentals of Economics
3 0 0 3
MGMT 310 /Principles of Management
STAT 204/ Probability and Statistical
3 1 0 4
MATH 311 Methods/Numerical Methods
ELE 311 Analog Integrated Circuits 3 1 0 4
ELE 301L Analog Integrated Circuits Lab 0 0 2 1
EEE 306 Electrical Machines -I 3 1 0 4
EEE 202L Electrical Machines –I Lab 0 0 2 1
EEE 309 Power System-I 3 1 0 4
EEE 309L Power System-I Lab 0 0 2 1
EIE 309 Linear Control System 3 1 0 4
EIE 309L Linear Control System Lab 0 0 2 1
Semester Total: 22 5 8 31

Semester - VI
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Vocational Course - II 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - III/Core
2 0 0 2
Foundation Course - V
MGMT 310/ Principles of Management/
3 0 0 3
ECO 307 Fundamentals of Economics
MATH 311/ Numerical Methods/Probability and
3 1 0 4
STAT 204 Statistical Methods
EEE 307 Electrical Machines-II 3 1 0 4
EEE 301L Electrical Machines-II Lab 0 0 2 1
EEE 308 Power Electronics 3 1 0 4
EEE 304L Power Electronics Lab 0 0 2 1
EEE 310 Power System-II 4 0 0 4
EEE 310L Power System-II Lab 0 0 2 1
EEE 311P Project 0 0 4 2
Semester Total: 20 3 10 28
32

Fourth Year
Semester - VII
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
ELE 410 Digital Signal Processing 3 1 0 4
ELE 304L Digital Signal Processing Lab 0 0 2 1
EEE 404 Switch Gear and Protection 4 0 0 4
EEE 411L Switch Gear and Protection Lab 0 0 2 1
ECE 411 Communication Engineering 4 0 0 4
ELE 509 Microprocessors and 4 0 0 4
Microcontrollers
ELE 306L Microprocessors and 0 0 2 1
Microcontrollers Lab
Discipline Elective 4 0 0 4
Discipline Elective Lab 0 0 2 1
Open Elective 4 0 0 4
Semester Total: 23 1 8 28

Semester - VIII
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
EEE 412P UIL Project 0 0 48 24
Reading Elective 0 0 0 2
Semester Total: 0 0 48 26

List of Discipline Elective

Course Code Course Name L T P C*
EEE 401 Electric Drives and Control 4 0 0 4
EEE 401L Electric Drives and Control Lab 0 0 2 1
EEE 409 Power System Operation and Control 4 0 0 4
EEE 409L Power System Operation and Control Lab 0 0 2 1
EEE 410 Power System Restructuring and 4 0 0 4
Deregulation
EEE 410L Power System Restructuring and 0 0 2 1
Deregulation Lab
EIE 307 Industrial Automation 4 0 0 4
EIE 307L Industrial Automation Lab 0 0 2 1
EIE 310 Process Control 4 0 0 4
EIE 310L Process Control Lab 0 0 2 1
MCTR 402 Mechatronics 4 0 0 4
MCTR 402L Mechatronics Lab 0 0 2 1
MCTR 403 Robotics and Automation 4 0 0 4
MCTR 403L Robotics and Automation Lab 0 0 2 1
33

List of Reading Electives

Computer Aided Power System Analysis
Fundamentals of Semiconductor devices
Advanced IOT Applications
Principles of Signals and Systems
Antennas
Electromagnetic Waves in guided and wireless media
Control Engineering
Industrial Automation and Control
Power System Dynamics, Control and Monitoring
Advance Power Electronics and Control
Introduction to Photonics
Biomedical Signal Processing
Interfacing with Arduino
Robotica
Analyzing Data with Python
Industry 4.0
Internet of Things
Industrial Robotics
SCADA
PLC
Advances in UHV Transmission & Distribution
Advanced IOT Applications
Mathematical Methods and techniques in signal processing
Electronics Modules for industrial applications using opamp
Quality Control
Electromagnetic Compatibility
34

List of Core Foundation Course

List of Elective Foundation Course

List of Vocational Courses

VOC 016 Introduction to Artificial Intelligence - I 2 0 0 2

Student can opt for at most 2 additional Open (Generic) audit/credit

Elective from other disciplines opting at most 1 per semester from
Semesters III onwards with prior permission of respective heads and
time table Permitting.

Every Student shall also opt for:

* L - Lecture hrs/week ; T - Tutorial hrs/week;

P - Project/Practical/Lab/All other non-classroom academic
activities, etc. hrs/week; C- Credit Points of the Course

Note: Syllabus of Foundation and Vocational courses are available in

separate booklet, Curriculum Structure and Syllabus Foundation
and Vocational Courses.
36

Curriculum Structure
Bachelor of Technology (Mechatronics Engineering)
First Year
Semester - I
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
BVF 011/ General English / lkekU; fgUnh 2 0 0 2
BVF 014
Core Foundation Course - I 2 0 0 2
MATH 103/ Calculus/Linear Algebra 3 1 0 4
MATH 107
PHY 101/ Applied Optics/Modern Physics 3 1 0 4
PHY 106
CHEM 101/ Chemistry/Biology 3 1 0 4
BIO 101
CHE 102/ Thermodynamics/Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 4
PHY 109
CS 109/ Computer Fundamentals and 4 0 0 4
EEE 101 Programming/Electrical Engineering
CS 109L/ Computer Fundamentals and Programming 0 0 4 2
EEE 101L Lab /Electrical Engineering Lab
ENGG 101L/ Engineering Drawing and Graphics Lab/ 0 0 6 3
ENGG 103 L Measurement Techniques Lab
Semester Total: 20 4 10 29

Semester - II
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
BVF 014/ lkekU; fgUnh / General English 2 0 0 2
BVF 011
Core Foundation Course - II 2 0 0 2
MATH 107/ Linear Algebra/Calculus 3 1 0 4
MATH 103
PHY 106/ Modern Physics/Applied Optics 3 1 0 4
PHY 101
BIO 101/ Biology/Chemistry 3 1 0 4
CHEM 101
PHY 109/ Engineering Mechanics/Thermodynamics 3 1 0 4
CHE 102
EEE 101/ Electrical Engineering / Computer 4 0 0 4
CS 109 Fundamentals and Programming
EEE 101L/ Electrical Engineering Lab/ Computer 0 0 4 2
CS 109L Fundamentals and Programming Lab
ENGG 103L/ Measurement Techniques Lab /Engineering 0 0 6 3
ENGG 101L Drawing and Graphics Lab
Semester Total: 20 4 10 29
37

Second Year
Semester - III
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Core Foundation Course - III 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - I 2 0 0 2
MATH 209/ Complex Variables/Differential 3 1 0 4
MATH 210 Equations
ENGG 201/ Structure and Properties of 4 0 0 4
ENGG 202 Materials/Basic Electronics
CS 209 Data Structures 4 0 0 4
CS 209L Data Structures Lab 0 0 4 2
MCTR 201 Pneumatic Engineering 4 0 0 4
MCTR 201L Pneumatic Engineering Lab 0 0 2 1
ELE 206 Digital Electronics 3 1 0 4
ELE 201L Digital Electronics Lab 0 0 2 1
MCTR 202S Seminar 0 0 2 1
Semester Total: 22 2 10 29

Semester - IV
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Core Foundation Course - IV 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - II 2 0 0 2
MATH 210/ Differential Equations/Complex 3 1 0 4
MATH 209 Variables
ENGG 202/ Basic Electronics/Structure and 4 0 0 4
ENGG 201 Properties of Materials
CS 214 Object Oriented Programming 4 0 0 4
CS 214L Object Oriented Programming Lab 0 0 4 2
EIE 204 Electrical and Electronics 4 0 0 4
Measurements
EIE 202L Electrical and Electronics 0 0 2 1
Measurements Lab
EEE 306 Electrical Machine-I 3 1 0 4
EEE 202L Electrical Machine-I Lab 0 0 2 1
Semester Total: 23 2 8 28
38

Third Year
Semester - V
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Vocational Course - I 2 0 0 2
Core Foundation Course - V/Elective 2 0 0 2
Foundation Course - III
ECO 307/ Fundamentals of Economics/Principles 3 0 0 3
MGMT 310 of Management
STAT 204/ Probability and Statistical 3 1 0 4
MATH 311 Methods/Numerical Methods
ELE 311 Analog Integrated Circuits 3 1 0 4
ELE 301L Analog Integrated Circuits Lab 0 0 2 1
EEE 307 Electrical Machine - II 3 1 0 4
EEE 301L Electrical Machine - II Lab 0 0 2 1
EIE 308 Industrial Instrumentation 4 0 0 4
EIE 308L Industrial Instrumentation Lab 0 0 2 1
EIE 309 Linear Control System 3 1 0 4
EIE 309L Linear Control System Lab 0 0 2 1
Semester Total: 23 4 8 31

Semester - VI
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Vocational Course - II 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - III/Core 2 0 0 2
Foundation Course - V
MGMT 310/ Principles of Management/ 3 0 0 3
ECO 307 Fundamentals of Economics
MATH 311/ Numerical Methods/Probability and 3 1 0 4
STAT 204 Statistical Methods
MCTR 305 Robotics and Control 4 0 0 4
MCTR 305L Robotics and Control Lab 0 0 2 1
EIE 307 Industrial Automation 4 0 0 4
EIE 307L Industrial Automation Lab 0 0 2 1
MCTR 304 Hydraulics Engineering 3 1 0 4
MCTR 304L Hydraulics Engineering Lab 0 0 2 1
MCTR 302P Project 0 0 4 2
Semester Total: 21 2 10 28
39

Fourth Year
Semester - VII
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
MCTR 425P UIL Project 0 0 48 24
Reading Elective 0 0 0 2
Semester Total: 0 0 48 26

Semester - VIII
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
EIE 310 Process Control 4 0 0 4
EIE 310L Process Control Lab 0 0 2 1
MCTR 408 Computer Integrated Manufacturing 4 0 0 4
System
MCTR 408L Computer Integrated Manufacturing 0 0 2 1
System Lab
MCTR 419 Mechatronics Systems 4 0 0 4
MCTR 419L Mechatronics Systems Lab 0 0 4 2
ELE 509 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 4 0 0 4
ELE 306L Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 0 0 2 1
Lab
Discipline Elective 4 0 0 4
Open Elective 4 0 0 4
Semester Total: 24 0 10 29

List of Discipline Elective

Course Code Course Name L T P C*
EEE 402 Energy Efficiency and Conservation 4 0 0 4
EIE 301 Biomedical Instrumentation 4 0 0 4
EIE 417 Power Plant Engineering 4 0 0 4
MCTR 420 Operation Research 4 0 0 4
MCTR 413 Industrial Engineering 4 0 0 4
MCTR 417 Manufacturing Science 4 0 0 4
MCTR 422 Production Technology 4 0 0 4
40

List of Reading Electives

Advances in UHV Transmission & Distribution
Fundamentals of Semiconductor devices
Advanced IOT Applications
Principles of Signals and Systems
Control Engineering
Industrial Automation and Control
Mathematical Methods and techniques in signal processing
Electronics Modules for Industrial Applications using Opamps
Chemical Process Instrumentation
Quality Control
Interfacing with Arduino
Robotica
Analyzing Data with Python
Industry 4.0
Internet of Things
Industrial Robotics
CNC Machining Turning
Autocad
Solar PV Technology
41

List of Core Foundation Course

List of Elective Foundation Course

List of Vocational Courses

VOC 016 Introduction to Artificial Intelligence - I 2 0 0 2

Student can opt for at most 2 additional Open (Generic) audit/credit

Elective from other disciplines opting at most 1 per semester from
Semesters III onwards with prior permission of respective heads and
time table Permitting.

Every Student shall also opt for:

* L - Lecture hrs/week ; T - Tutorial hrs/week;

P - Project/Practical/Lab/All other non-classroom academic
activities, etc. hrs/week; C- Credit Points of the Course

Note: Syllabus of Foundation and Vocational courses are available in

separate booklet, Curriculum Structure and Syllabus Foundation
and Vocational Courses.
43

Curriculum Structure
Bachelor of Technology (Electronics and Communication Engineering)
First Year
Semester - I
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
BVF 011/ General English /lkekU; fgUnh 2 0 0 2
BVF 014
Core Foundation Course - I 2 0 0 2
MATH 103/ Calculus/ Linear Algebra 3 1 0 4
MATH 107
PHY 101/ Applied Optics/ Modern Physics 3 1 0 4
PHY 106
CHEM 101/ Chemistry/ Biology 3 1 0 4
BIO 101
CHE 102/ Thermodynamics/ Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 4
PHY 109
CS 109/ Computer Fundamentals and 4 0 0 4
EEE 101 Programming/ Electrical Engineering
CS 109L/ Computer Fundamentals and Programming 0 0 4 2
EEE 101L Lab/ Electrical Engineering Lab
ENGG 101L / Engineering Drawing and Graphics Lab/ 0 0 6 3
ENGG 103L Measurement Techniques Lab
Semester Total: 20 4 10 29

Semester - II
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
BVF 014/ lkekU; fgUnh /General English 2 0 0 2
BVF 011
Core Foundation Course – II 2 0 0 2
MATH 107 / Linear Algebra/ Calculus 3 1 0 4
MATH 103
PHY 106 / Modern Physics / Applied Optics 3 1 0 4
PHY 101
BIO 101/ Biology / Chemistry 3 1 0 4
CHEM 101
PHY 109 / Engineering Mechanics / Thermodynamics 3 1 0 4
CHE 102
EEE 101/ Electrical Engineering / Computer 4 0 0 4
CS 109 Fundamentals and Programming
EEE 101L / Electrical Engineering Lab / Computer 0 0 4 2
CS 109L Fundamentals and Programming Lab
ENGG 103L / Measurement Techniques Lab / 0 0 6 3
ENGG 101L Engineering Drawing and Graphics Lab
Semester Total: 20 4 10 29
44

Second Year
Semester - III
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Core Foundation Course - III 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - I 2 0 0 2
MATH 210/ Differential Equations / Complex
3 1 0 4
MATH 209 Variables
ENGG 202 / Basic Electronics/ Structure and
4 0 0 4
ENGG 201 Properties of Materials
CS 209 Data Structures 4 0 0 4
CS 209L Data Structures Lab 0 0 4 2
ECE 201 Signals, Systems and Networks 4 0 0 4
ELE 206 Digital Electronics 3 1 0 4
ELE 201L Digital Electronics Lab 0 0 2 1
Semester Total: 22 2 6 27

Semester - IV
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
Core Foundation Course - IV 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - II 2 0 0 2
MATH 209/ Complex Variables / Differential 3 1 0 4
MATH 210 Equations
ENGG 201/ Structure and Properties of Materials / 4 0 0 4
ENGG 202 Basic Electronics
CS 214 Object Oriented Programming 4 0 0 4
CS 214L Object Oriented Programming Lab 0 0 4 2
ECE 202S Seminar 0 0 2 1
EIE 204 Electrical and Electronics Measurements 4 0 0 4
EIE 204L Electrical and Electronics Measurements 0 0 2 1
Lab
ELE 205 Semiconductor Devices and Circuits 4 0 0 4
ELE 205L Semiconductor Devices and Circuits Lab 0 0 2 1
Semester Total: 23 1 10 29
45

Third Year
Semester - V
Course
Course Name L T P C*
Code
Vocational Course - I 2 0 0 2
Core Foundation Course-V / Elective 2 0 0 2
Foundation Course - III
MGMT 310/ Principles of Management/Fundamentals of 3 0 0 3
ECO 307 Economics
STAT 204/ Probability and Statistical Methods/ 3 1 0 4
MATH 311 Numerical Methods
ECE 301 Analog Communication 4 0 0 4
ECE 301L Analog Communication Lab 0 0 2 1
ELE 509 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 4 0 0 4
ELE 306L Microprocessor and Microcontrollers lab 0 0 2 1
ELE 310 Analog Electronics 4 0 0 4
ELE 310L Analog Electronics Lab 0 0 2 1
ELE 202 Electromagnetic field Theory 4 0 0 4
Semester Total: 26 1 6 30

Semester - VI
Course
Course Name L T P C*
Code
Vocational Course - II 2 0 0 2
Elective Foundation Course - III/ Core 2 0 0 2
Foundation Course - V
ECO 307/ Fundamentals of Economics / Principles of 3 0 0 3
MGMT 310 Management
MATH 311/ Numerical Methods/Probability and 3 1 0 4
STAT 204 Statistical Methods
ECE 305 Microwave Engineering 4 0 0 4
ECE 305L Microwave Engineering Lab 0 0 2 1
EIE 311 Control Systems 4 0 0 4
EIE 302L Control Systems Lab 0 0 2 1
ECE 304 Digital Communication 4 0 0 4
ECE 304L Digital Communication Lab 0 0 2 1
ECE 306P Project 0 0 4 2
Semester Total: 22 1 10 28
46

Fourth Year
Semester - VII
Course
Course Name L T P C*
Code
ECE 409 Antenna Analysis 4 0 0 4
ECE 409L Antenna Analysis Lab 0 0 2 1
ECE 402 Fiber Optics and Communication 4 0 0 4
ECE 402L Fiber Optics and Communication Lab 0 0 2 1
VLSI 401 VLSI Design 4 0 0 4
VLSI 402L VLSI Design Lab 0 0 2 1
ECE 303 Communication Networks 4 0 0 4
Discipline Elective 4 0 0 4
Open Elective 4 0 0 4
Semester Total: 24 0 6 27

Semester - VIII
Course Code Course Name L T P C*
ECE 412P UIL Project 0 0 48 24
Reading Elective 0 0 0 2
Semester Total: 0 0 48 26

List of Discipline Elective

Course Code Course Name L T P C*
EIE 301 Biomedical Instrumentation 4 0 0 4
ECE 404 Optical Network 4 0 0 4
ECE 406 Satellite Communication 4 0 0 4
ELE 403 Basics of Nano electronics 4 0 0 4
ECE 403 Mobile Communication 4 0 0 4
ECE 405 Radar Navigation 4 0 0 4
ELE 304 Digital Signal Processing 4 0 0 4
RS 401 Geoinformatics 4 0 0 4
ECE 408 Analytical Instrumentation 4 0 0 4
ELE 402 Audio and Video Systems 4 0 0 4
MCTR 403 Robotics and Automation 4 0 0 4
EEE 308 Power Electronics 3 1 0 4
MCTR 402 Mechatronics 4 0 0 4
47

List of Reading Electives

Electronic Packaging
Multimedia Compression and Communication
Professional Ethics
Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks
Electric Vehicles
IoT Sensors and Devices

List of Core Foundation Course

List of Elective Foundation Course

List of Vocational Courses

VOC 022 Web Designing and Internet Technology-I 1 0 0 1

VOC 022L Web Designing and Internet 0 0 2 1
Technology-I Lab
VOC 023 Web Designing and Internet Technology-II 1 0 0 1
VOC 023L Web Designing and Internet 0 0 2 1
Technology-II Lab
VOC 009 Library Science - I 1 0 0 1
VOC 009L Library Science – I Lab 0 0 2 1
VOC 010 Library Science – II 1 0 0 1
VOC 010L Library Science – II Lab 0 0 2 1
VOC 018 Photography - I 0 0 4 2
VOC 019 Photography - II 0 0 4 2
VOC 016 Introduction to Artificial Intelligence - I 2 0 0 2
VOC 023 Introduction to Artificial Intelligence - II 2 0 0 2
VOC 012 Computer Assisted Learning and Teaching 1 0 0 1
VOC 012L Computer Assisted Learning and 0 0 2 1
Teaching Lab
VOC 013 Emerging Technologies for Learning and 2 0 0 2
Teaching

Student can opt for at most 2 additional Open (Generic) audit/credit

Elective from other disciplines opting at most 1 per semester from
Semesters III onwards with prior permission of respective heads and
time table Permitting.

Every Student shall also opt for:

* L - Lecture hrs/week ; T - Tutorial hrs/week;

P - Project/Practical/Lab/All other non-classroom academic
activities, etc. hrs/week; C- Credit Points of the Course

Note: Syllabus of Foundation and Vocational courses are available in

separate booklet, Curriculum Structure and Syllabus Foundation
and Vocational Courses.
49

Five Fold Activities

Fine Arts Physical Education and Sports
BVFF 101 Classical Dance (Bharatnatyam) BVFF 201 Aerobics
BVFF 102 Classical Dance (Kathak) BVFF 202 Archery
BVFF 103 Classical Dance (Manipuri) BVFF 203 Athletics
BVFF 104 Creative Art BVFF 204 Badminton
BVFF 105 Folk Dance BVFF 205 Basketball
BVFF 106 Music-Instrumental (Guitar) BVFF 206 Cricket
BVFF 107 Music-Instrumental (Orchestra) BVFF 207 Equestrian
BVFF 108 Music-Instrumental (Sarod) BVFF 208 Flying - Flight Radio Telephone
Operator's Licence (Restricted)
BVFF 109 Music-Instrumental (Sitar) BVFF 209 Flying - Student Pilot's Licence
BVFF 110 Music-Instrumental (Tabla) BVFF 229 Aeromodelling
BVFF 111 Music-Instrumental (Violin) BVFF 210 Football
BVFF 112 Music-Vocal BVFF 211 Gymnastics
BVFF 113 Theatre BVFF 212 Handball
BVFF 213 Hockey
Social Service and Extension Activities BVFF 214 Judo
BVFF 301 Banasthali Sewa Dal BVFF 215 Kabaddi
BVFF 302 Extension Programs for Women BVFF 216 Karate – Do
Empowerment
BVFF 303 FM Radio BVFF 217 Kho-Kho
BVFF 304 Informal Education BVFF 218 Net Ball
BVFF 305 National Service Scheme BVFF 219 Rope Mallakhamb
BVFF 306 National Cadet Corps BVFF 220 Shooting
BVFF 221 Soft Ball
BVFF 222 Swimming
BVFF 223 Table Tennis
BVFF 224 Tennis
BVFF 225 Throwball
BVFF 226 Volleyball
BVFF 227 Weight Training
BVFF 228 Yoga
50

Evaluation Scheme and Grading System

Continuous Assessment (CA) End-Semester Grand Total
(Max. Marks) Assessment (Max.
(ESA) Marks)
Assignment Periodical Test Total (Max. Marks)
I II I II (CA)
10 10 10 10 40 60 100

In all theory, laboratory and other non classroom activities (project,

dissertation, seminar, etc.), the Continuous and End-semester assessment
will be of 40 and 60 marks respectively. However, for Reading Elective,
only End semester exam of 100 marks will be held. Wherever desired, the
detailed breakup of continuous assessment marks (40), for project,
practical, dissertation, seminar, etc shall be announced by respective
departments in respective student handouts.
Based on the cumulative performance in the continuous and end-semester
assessments, the grade obtained by the student in each course shall be
awarded. The classification of grades is as under:
Letter Grade Grade Point Narration
O 10 Outstanding
A+ 9 Excellent
A 8 Very Good
B+ 7 Good
B 6 Above Average
C+ 5 Average
C 4 Below Average
D 3 Marginal
E 2 Exposed
NC 0 Not Cleared

Based on the obtained grades, the Semester Grade Point Average shall be
computed as under:
51

Where n is the number of courses (with letter grading) registered in the

semester, CCi are the course credits attached to the ith course with letter
grading and GPi is the letter grade point obtained in the ith course. The
courses which are given Non-Letter Grades are not considered in the
calculation of SGPA.
The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) at the end of each semester
shall be computed as under:

Where n is the number of all the courses (with letter grading) that a student
has taken up to the previous semester.
Student shall be required to maintain a minimum of 4.00 CGPA at the end
of each semester. If a student's CGPA remains below 4.00 in two
consecutive semesters, then the student will be placed under probation and
the case will be referred to Academic Performance Review Committee
(APRC) which will decide the course load of the student for successive
semester till the student comes out of the probationary clause.
To clear a course of a degree program, a student should obtain letter grade
C and above. However, D/E grade in two/one of the courses throughout the
UG/PG degree program respectively shall be deemed to have cleared the
respective course(s). The excess of two/one D/E course(s) in UG/PG degree
program shall become the backlog course(s) and the student will be
required to repeat and clear them in successive semester(s) by obtaining
grade C or above.
After successfully clearing all the courses of the degree program, the
student shall be awarded division as per following table.
Division CGPA
Distinction 7.50 and above
First Division 6.00 to 7.49
Second Division 5.00 to 5.99
Pass 4.00 to 4.99

CGPA to % Conversion Formula: % of Marks Obtained = CGPA * 10

______
52

Detailed Syllabus
MATH 103 Calculus
Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
• Define limit, infinite series and sequence of partial sums of an infinite
series, Convergence and Divergence of an infinite series.
• Relate the limit of a function at a point to the limit of a sequence at that
point and tell when a function will fail to have a limit at a point.
• Define monotonic functions and find a connection between
monotonicity of a function and derivative of a function.
• Demonstrate the concept of Divergence, Curl, Green’s theorem,
Stokes’s theorem.
Section A
Sequences, series, test for convergence, power series, radius of
convergence; limit, continuity and differentiability (analytic definitions
with simple examples); Rolle’s Theorem, mean value theorem and Taylor’s
theorem; Successive differentiation: Leibnitz’ theorem (without proof).
Section B
Review of vectors, Cylinders and quadric surfaces, Vector functions of one
variable and their derivatives, Partial derivatives: Chain rule, exact
differentials, Gradient, Directional derivative, Tangent planes and normals,
Maxima and minima (two variables) including Lagrange’s multipliers,
Asymptotes and Curve tracing.
Section C
Riemann integral and the fundamental theorem of integral calculus,
Reduction Formulae, Multiple integrals, Applications to multiple integrals
to find length, area, surface area, volume, surface area of revolution,
Improper integral.
Vector fields, Surface integral, Line integral, Independence of path,
Conservative fields, Divergence, Curl, Green’s theorem, Stokes’s theorem.
53

Suggested Books:
1. Thomas, G.B., Weir, M.D., & Hass, J. (2011). Thomas’ Calculus (11th
ed.).Boston, MA: Pearson Education, Inc.
2. Kreyszig, E. (2011). Advanced Engineering Mathematics (9th ed.).
Hoboken, NJ : John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
3. Apostol, T.M. (1980). Calculus (2nded.). New York, NY: John Wiley
& Sons, Inc.
4. Grewal, B.S., & Grewal, J.S. (2012). Higher Engineering Mathematics
(42thed.). India, Delhi: Khanna Publishers.
Suggested E-learning material:
1. Differentiation and Integration of Vector Functions
http://vle.du.ac.in/pluginfile.php/837/mod_resource/content/0/Different
iation%20and%20Integration%20of%20Vector%20Functions.pdf
2. Mean Value Theorems
http://vle.du.ac.in/pluginfile.php/844/mod_resource/content/0/Mean%2
0Value%20Theorems.pdf
3. Infinite Series
http://vle.du.ac.in/pluginfile.php/861/mod_resource/content/0/Infinite%
20Series.pdf

MATH 107 Linear Algebra

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
• Define basic terms and concepts of matrices, vectors and complex
numbers
• Use basic vector space concepts such as linear space, linear dependence,
basis, dimension, linear transformation;
• Be familiar with the concepts of eigenvalue, eigenspace and eigenvector
and know how to compute these objects;
• Use the characteristic polynomial to compute the eigenvalues and
eigenvectors of a square matrix and use them to diagonalise matrices
54

when this is possible; discriminate between 54iagonalizable and non-

diagonalisable matrices.
• Use gauss-jordan elimination to solve systems of linear equations and to
compute the inverse of an invertible matrix
Section A
Vectors, Algebra of vectors, vector spaces, subspaces, Linear sum and
direct sum of subspaces, Linear combination, Linear span, Linear
dependence and independence of vectors and its properties. Basis and
dimension of vector space and subspace. Linear mappings, Kernel and
Range of linear mapping, Singular and non-singular mappings.
Section B
Linear operator, Algebra of linear operators, Invertible operators, Matrix
representation of a linear transformation, Change of basis, Range, rank and
Kernel, nullity of a matrix, Elementary transformations, Matrix inversion
with elementary transformations, Normal form of a matrix, System of linear
equations.
Section C
Characteristics polynomial of a matrix, Characteristics values,
Characteristics vector, Cayley-Hamilton theorem, Diagonalization of
Matrices, Properties of characteristic values and characteristic vectors of
Hermitian, skew-Hermitian, Unitary and Normal matrices (including
Symmetric, Skew-symmetric and Orthogonal matrices).
Inner product spaces, Orthogonality, Orthogonal sets and bases, Gram-
Schmidt orthogonalization process.
Suggested Books:
1. Axler, S. J. (1996). Linear algebra done right. New York: Springer.
2. Krishnamurthy, V., Mainra, V. P., & Arora, J. L. (1976). An
introduction to linear algebra. New Delhi: East-West Press.
3. Friedberg, S. H., Insel, A. J., Spence, L. E., & Thiel, L. (2017). Linear
algebra. Pearson Education.
4. Halmos, P. R. (2013). Linear Algebra Problem Book. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
5. Kumaresan, S. (2000). Linear Algebra: A Geometric Approach. New
Delhi: Prentice-Hall (India).
55

Suggested E-learning material:

1. Lecture notes on linear Algebra
https://nptel.ac.in/downloads/111102011/
2. Videos on Linear Algebra topics
http://web.mit.edu/18.06/www/videos.shtml

PHY 101 Applied Optics

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcome:
After completion of the course students will be able to:
• Appreciate the efficacy of Fourier transforms and their application to
physical systems.
• Understand linear, time-invariant systems.
• Understand the role of the wave equation and appreciate the universal
nature of wave motion in a range of physical systems
• Understand dispersion in waves and model dispersion using Fourier
theory.
• Understand diffraction and imaging in terms of Fourier optics and gain
physical and intuitive insight in a range of ph
Section A
Wave Optics- Interference: Superposition of Waves, Theory and method
of measurement of wavelength of light and thickness of a thin transparent
plate using Fresnel's Bi-prism, Interference in thin films, Newton's rings,
Michelson's Interferometer,
Diffraction I: Fraunhofer's diffraction due to single slit, two parallel slits
and N slits.
Section B
Diffraction II: Diffraction by plane transmission Grating (PTG),
Characteristics of Grating Spectra, Measurement of Wavelength of light
56

using PTG, Concept of resolving power, Rayleigh's criterion of resolving

limit, Resolving power of a Grating, Diffraction of X-rays and Bragg's law.
Polarization: Production and detection of plane, Circularly and elliptically
polarized light, theory of the polarized light, Optical Activity, Fresnel's
Explanation for optical rotation, Measurement of Specific rotation of a cane
sugar solution using a Half Shade and a biquartz device polarimeter.
Section C
Modern Optics-Lasers : Spontaneous & Stimulates Emission, Einstein’s
Coefficient, Criterion of Laser action, Ruby and He-Ne Lasers,
Characteristics of Laser light, Application of Laser with special emphasis
on Holography.
Optical Fiber: Elementary idea of optical fiber, Light wave
communication using optical fibers, Types of optical fibers, Step Index
(Single mode and Multi mode) and Graded Index fiber, Light Propagation
through optical fiber,
Ray Optics: Critical angle, Total internal reflection, Aceptance angle,
Numerical aperture of an optical fiber.
Suggested Readings:
1. Prakash S., Verma A. S., Gupta S. K. and Alvi P. A. (2015) A textbook
of Optics and Modern Physics, Pragati Prakashan Meerut.
2. Allen S. R. (1997) An introduction to Fiber Optics, PHI
3. Seth S. P. (2007) Elements of Electromagnetic Field, Dhanpat Rai &
Company.
4. Ghatak A. (2005) Optics, Tata McGraw hill publication
5. Beynon (1996) Introductory University optics, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd.
6. Thyagarajan and Ghatak (1981) Lasers Theory and Applications:
Macmillan India Ltd
7. Senior John M. (2005) An introduction to Fiber Optics, PHI
8. Sadiku M. N. O (2007) Elements of Electromagnetics, Oxford
University Press.
Suggested E-Learning Materials:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/course.php
57

PHY 106 Modern Physics

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcome:
After completion of the course students will be able to:
• Development of an understanding of the interrelationships of science,
eengineering and technology.
• Will have skill for problem solving and engineering skills, which then
has broad applications.
• Will have a career paths for Engineering physics are usually (broadly)
"engineering, applied science or applied physics through research,
teaching or entrepreneurial engineering". This interdisciplinary
knowledge is designed for the continuous innovation occurring with
technology.
• Will have strong ground to provide a more thorough grounding in
applied physics of any area chosen by the student (such as
nanotechnology, mechanical engineering, electrical engineering,
control theory, aerodynamics, or solid-state physics).
Section A
Special Theory of Relativity: Inertial and non-inertial frames of reference,
postulates of special theory of relativity, Lorentz Transformations,
Relativity of mass, length, time and velocity, Mass energy relation, energy
momentum relation;
Wave Mechanics: Compton effect as evidence of quantum nature of
radiation, Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle, Time dependent & Time
independent (Steady State) form of the Schrödinger equation, Solution of
Schrodinger equation for free particle in a one dimension box and Potential
step.
Section B
Free-electron model of metals, Origin of Bands in solids (Kronig-Penny
model), E-k diagram, classification of solids as metal, semiconductors and
insulators, Density of energy states and Fermi energy, Crystal structures of
Si, Ge and GaAs, Electrical resistivity of semiconductors.
58

Superconductivity: Introduction, Types of superconductors, Properties of

superconductors, Meisner effect, Joshephson effect, BCS theory of
superconductivity (no derivation) only qualitative discussion, High
Temperature superconductors, Applications of superconductors.
Section C
Dielectric Materials: Dielectric Constant, Type of Dielectrics, Polarization
of Dielectrics, Polarization density, Relation between dielectric constant
and electric susceptibility, Types of Polarization (Electronic polarization,
ionic polarization, orientation polarization), Clausius-Mosotti Equation,
Nuclear Physics: Nuclear Binding Energy, Fission and Fusion Reactions,
Construction, theory and applications of Geiger Muller Counter ,
Proportional and Scintillation Counter.
Suggested Books:
1. Beiser, A. (2003). Concepts of modern physics. Tata McGraw-Hill
Education.
2. Krane, K. S. (1995). Modern physics. Modern Physics, 2nd Edition, by
Kenneth S. Krane,. ISBN 0-471-82872-6. Wiley-VCH, August 1995.,
3. Birkhoff, G. D., & Langer, R. E. (1923). Relativity and modern
physics. Harvard University Press.
4. Leighton, R. B., & Leighton, R. B. (1959). Principles of modern
physics (Vol. 795). New York: McGraw-Hill.
5. Prakash S., Verma A. S., Gupta S. K. and Alvi P. A. (2015) A textbook
of Optics and Modern Physics, Pragati Prakashan Meerut
6. Raghuvanshi (2008) Engineering Physics, Tata Mc Hill
Suggested E-Learning Materials:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/course.php

CHEM 101 Chemistry

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcome:
On completion of course, the students will be able to:
• explain the basics of atomic structure and chemical bonding.
59

• explain the behavior of the system through phase, degree of freedom and
component.
• explain the basics of electrochemistry, different type of corrosion and
their prevention.
• differentiate nanoscience, nanotechnology, nanochemistry, conventional
and non-conventional energy sources and their applications.
Section A
Atomic Structure:Schrodinger wave equation, significance of 
and  , quantum numbers, radial and angular wave function and
2

probability distribution curves, shapes of s, p, d orbitals. Aufbau and Pauli

principles, Hund’s multiplicity rule, exchange energy, pairing energy,
symmetrical distribution of charge, extra stability of half-filled and
completely-filled orbitals, effective nuclear charge, shielding effect, Slater’s
rules for evaluation of shielding constant.
Chemical Bonding:Covalent bond: - resonance, valence bond theory
and its limitations, directional characteristics of covalent bond, various
types of hybridization and shapes of simple inorganic molecules and ions,
valence shell electron pair repulsion (VSEPR) theory with reference to BF3,
BF4-, NH3, H2O, H3O+, PCl5, SF4, CIF3, I3-, SF6, IF7, ICI2-, and
POCl3; MO theory, sigma, pi and delta molecular orbitals, homonuclear
and heteronuclear (CO and NO) diatomic molecules and their ions.
Section B
Electrochemistry:Electric transport in electrolytic solutions, specific
conductance and equivalent conductance, measurement of equivalent
conductance, variation of equivalent and specific conductance with dilution,
migration of ions and Kohlrausch law, Arrhenius theory of electrolyte
dissociation and its uses and limitations, Debye-Huckel-Onsager’s equation
for strong electrolytes (elementary treatment only), applications of
conductivity measurement: determination of degree of dissociation,
determination of Ka of acids, determination of solubility product of
sparingly soluble salt, conductometric titrations.
Phase Rule: Phase, component, degree of freedom or variance;
phase diagram of one-component system: -water system, sulphur system,
60

CO2 system, phase rule for two-component system: - Pb-Ag system and its
applications, reduced phase rule, eutectic point.
Corrosion:Definition and its significance, Mechanisms of corrosion:
Chemical (Dry) corrosion and Electrochemical (Wet) corrosion, Protection
from corrosion: Protective coatings, cathodic protection, sacrificial anode
and modification in designs etc.
Section C
Water: Hardness of water, determination of hardness by Clark’s test
and Complex metric (EDTA) method, degree of hardness, numerical based
on hardness and EDTA method, Softening of water by Lime-Soda Method,
Permutit (Zeolite) Method and Deionization or Demineralization Method,
Boiler troubles their causes, disadvantages and prevention, Formation of
solids (Scale and Sludge), Carry over (Priming and Foaming), Corrosion
and Caustic Embrittlement, Advanced methods of water starelization,
Numerical problems based on Lime-Soda and Zeolite softening methods
Organic Electronic Materials: Including conducting polymers-
poly (p-phenylene), polythiophenes, Polyphenylenevinylenes, polypyroles,
polyaniline.
Optical Fibers- Introduction, properties, preparation, optical fiber
grade glass and uses.
Nano-chemistry- Introduction, Size dependent properties, Synthesis
(bottom-up and top-down method) and Applications of nanomaterials,
Future prospective of nanomaterials.
Non-conventional Energy: Introduction of solar energy,
Application of solar energy, Photovoltaic cell, conversion of solar energy,
silicon, bio-fuel and biomass, Superiority of non-conventional source of
energy over conventional energy.
Recommended Books:
1. B.R. Puri and L.R. Sharma & K.C. Kalia (2017), Principles of
Inorganic Chemistry, 33rd Ed.,Vishal Publications.
2. L.R Sharma, M.S Pathania B.R Puri and Navjot Kaur (2018), A
Textbook of Physical Chemistry, Vishal Publications.
3. W. U. Malik, G.D.Tuli & R. D. Madan (2010), Selected Topics in
Inorganic Chemistry, Revised Ed., S. Chand Publications.
4. Gurdeep Raj(2014), Advanced Physical Chemistry, goel publications.
61

5. J.D. Lee (1998), Concise Inorganic Chemistry,5th Ed, Oxford

Publications.
6. F. A. Cotton and G. Wilkinson (1994), Basic Inorganic Chemistry,3rd
Ed., John Wiley Publications.
7. P. Bhagchandani (2017), Inorganic Chemistry, Sahitya Bhawan
Publications.
8. S.S. Dara and S.S.Umare (2004), Textbook of Engineering Chemistry,
S. Chand Publications.
Suggested e-Sources:
1. National Programme on Technology Enhanced Learning
https://nptel.ac.in
2. Online Chemistry Courses
https://www.edx.org/learn/chemistry
3. Free Online Education SWAYAM
https://swayam.gov.in

BIO 101 Biology

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
• Understand the basic organization and classification of living
organisms.
• Describe fundamental cellular functions.
• Learn the basic concept of molecular biology and recombinant DNA
technology.
Section A
• Brief idea of origin of life, Viruses (TMV, HIV, Bacteriophages),
overview and brief introduction to five kingdom classification,
characteristic features of Protista, Plantae and Animalia.
62

• Morphology and functions of different parts of flowering plants: Root,

stem, leaf, major inflorescence (Spike, Raceme, Corymb and Umbel),
flower, fruit and seed.
• Brief about the components and functions of different systems of
humans.
Section B
• The cell concept, prokaryotic (Bacteria, cell structure) and eukaryotic
cell (plant and animal cell). Cell organelles and their functions.
• Brief introduction and significance of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins
and enzymes.
• Mendelian inheritance chromosome theory of inheritance, deviations
from mendelian ratio (Incomplete dominance, co-dominance,
complementary genes, multiple alleles). Linkage and crossing over, sex
determination, sex linked inheritance, genetic counseling.
Section C
• Structure and replication of DNA, structure of RNA and brief concept
of transcription and translation in prokaryotes and comparison with
eukaryotes, Genetic code, Basic concept of recombinant DNA
Technology and its applications. Overview of Human Genome Project,
Biosafety issues.
Suggested Books:
➢ Green, N. P. O., Stout, G. W., Taylor, D. J. & Soper, R. (2005).
Biological Sciences. Cambridge University Press.
➢ Reece, J. B., Urry, L. A., Cain, M. L., Wasserman, S. A., Minorsky, P.
V., & Jackson, R.B. (2013). Campbell Biology. Pearson Publisher,
India.
Suggested e-Resources:
➢ Structural organization of plants and animals
https://www.emedicalprep.com/study-material/biology/structural-
organization-in-plants-and-animals/
➢ Morphology, anatomy and functions of different systems of
humans:
63

https://www.khanacademy.org/science/high-school-biology/hs-human-
body-systems/hs-body-structure-and-homeostasis/a/tissues-organs-
organ-systems
➢ Basic concept of cell
https://biologydictionary.net/cell/
➢ Gene-gene interaction
http://www.biologydiscussion.com/genetics/gene-interactions/gene-
interactions-allelic-and-non-allelic-cell-biology/38795
➢ Human genome project
https://www.genome.gov/12011238/an-overview-of-the-human-
genome-project/
➢ Application of recombinant DNA technology:
https://medcraveonline.com/JABB/JABB-01-00013

CHE 102 Thermodynamics

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning outcomes:
The students will be able to:
• Carryout thermodynamic analysis of real systems.
• Carryout thermodynamic analysis multiphase systems with chemical
changes.
• Understand thermodynamic functions and their relationships
Section A
Definition, significance and limitations, Classical versus statistical 1 in
closed systems, zeroth law of thermodynamics and the absolute temperature
scale.
Section B
Thermochemistry: Heat of reaction at constant pressure and at constant
volume, Hess’s law of heat summation and its application, temperature
64

dependence of enthalpy (Kirchhoff’s equation), bond dissociation energy

and its calculation from thermo-chemical data,
Second law of Thermodynamics: need for the law, different statements of
the law, Carnot cycle and its efficiency, Carnot theorem, Heat Engine,
Efficiencies, thermodynamic scale of temperature.
Concept of Entropy: Entropy as a state function, entropy as a function of V
& T, entropy as a function of P & T, entropy change in physical change,
Clausius inequality, entropy as a criteria of spontaneity and equilibrium,
entropy change in ideal gases and mixing of gases.
Section C
Thermodynamic Relations: Maxwell’s equations, TdS equations,
difference in heat capacities, ratio of heat capacities, energy equations,
Joule-Kelvin effect, Clausius-Clapeyron equation.
Third law of Thermodynamics: Nernst heat theorem, statement and
concept of residual entropy, evaluation of absolute entropy from heat
capacity data, Gibb’s and Helmholtz functions: Gibbs-Helmholtz equation,
Gibbs function (G) and Helmholtz function (A) as thermodynamic
quantities, A &G as criteria for thermodynamic equilibrium and
spontaneity, their advantage over entropy change, variation of G and A with
P, V and T.
Recommended Books:
1. Atkins, P. W., & De, P. J. (2006). Atkins' physical chemistry. Oxford:
Oxford University Press.
2. Puri, S., Sharma, R. L., & Pathania M. S. (2004). Principles of
physical chemistry. Vishal Publishing Co.
3. Sharma, K. K., & Sharma, L. K. (1977). A textbook of physical
chemistry. Vikas Publishing House.
4. P. K. Nag (2009). Basic & applied thermodynamics. Tata McGraw
Hill.
5. Van Ness, H. C. (1983). Understanding thermodynamics. Courier
Corporation.
6. Van Wylen, G. J., & Sonntag, R. E. (1985). Fundamentals of classical
thermodynamics. New York: Wiley.
E-resource(s): https://nptel.ac.in
65

PHY 109 Engineering Mechanics

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcome:
After completion of the course students will be able to:
• Students will demonstrate proficiency in mathematics and the
mathematical concepts needed for a proper understanding of physics.
• Students will show that they have learned laboratory skills, enabling
them to take measurements in a physics laboratory and analyze the
measurements to draw valid conclusions.
• Students will be capable of oral and written scientific communication,
and will prove that they can think critically and work independently
Section A
System of forces, Fundamental laws of mechanics, Composition of forces,
Free body diagram, Lami’s theorem, Moments and couple, Varignon’s
theorem, Condition of equilibrium, Types of support and loading, Reaction,
Analysis of simple trusses by methods of joints and methods of sections.
The laws of Coulomb friction, Ladder, wedges, Belt friction and rolling,
Principle of virtual work and its applications.
Section B
Location of centroid and center of gravity, area moment of inertia, mass
moment of inertia law of mechanics, Variation of mechanical advantages,
efficiency, reversibility of machine Pulleys, wheel and axle, wheel and
differential axle, Transmission of power through a belt and rope, Moment
of inertia of masses- Transfer formula for mass moments of inertia- Mass
moment of inertia of composite bodies.
Section C
Kinematics of a Particle: Rectilinear motion, plane curvilinear motion,
Projectile motion, Constrained motion of connected particles.
Dynamics of Particles and Rigid Body: Newton’s Law of motion,
D’Alembert’s principle.
Work & energy: Work, Energy (Potential, kinetic and spring), Work-
Energy relation, Law of conservation of energy,
66

Impulse & momentum: Impulse, momentum, Impulse-momentum

relation, Impact
Vibration: Definitions, Concepts- simple harmonic motion-free vibrations-
simple and compound pendulums-torsional vibrations.
Suggested Books:
1. Kumar D. S. (2009) Engineering Mechanics, Laxmi Publication
2. Dubey N. H (2015) Engineering Mechanics, McGraw Hill Edu
3. Sharma M. (2009) Engineering Mechanics, CBH
4. Sharma (2009) Mechanics, Pearson
Suggested Web Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/course.php

CS 109 Computer Fundamentals and Programming

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
• Describe the concepts of computer basics and programming.
• Explain the organization and operations of a computer system.
• Design the combinational and sequential circuits.
• Employ the logical thinking for analyzing problems, designing and
implementing algorithmic solutions.
• Employ the skills for the use of the C programming language to
implement the real world applications.
Section A
Brief introduction to computer organization, Block diagram, Hardware and
software. Introduction to operating System, Concept of Data and
Information, Representation of data, bits and bytes, Number System
(binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal), Representation of integers, real
numbers, positive and negative numbers, Binary arithmetic, simple
67

concepts and theorems of Boolean algebra. Representation of characters:

BCD, ASCII, EBCDIC codes. Programming fundamentals: Program, Steps
in program development, programming language, compilers, interpreters.
Algorithms, flowcharts, Control statements sequencing, conditional and
unconditional branching and looping.
Section B
Overview of C language- History, structure of a program data types,
variables, constants, operators (arithmetic, logical, relational), expressions
(arithmetic and logical), assignments, conditional statements, control
statements, simple I/O. Single and multi-dimensional arrays, Searching
(linear, binary), sorting (bubble, selection) and merging, matrix arithmetic.
Section C
Concept of pointers, pointer expression, pointer v/s arrays, functions,
parameter passing (call by value, call by reference), recursion, structure,
union and enumerated data types, concept of structured programming.
Suggested Books:
1. Sinha, P. K. (2003). Computer fundamentals: concepts, systems &
applications. BPB publications.
2. Balagurusamy, E. (2012). Programming in ANSI C. Tata McGraw-Hill
Education.
3. Kanetkar, Y. P. (2016). Let us C. BPB publications.
4. Rajaraman, V., & ADABALA, N. (2014). Fundamentals of computers.
PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
Suggested E-learning material:
1. Introduction to Programming in C
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106104128/
2. Introduction to Programming in C Specialization
https://www.coursera.org/specializations/c-programming
3. Sinha, P. K. (2003). Computer fundamentals: concepts, systems &
applications. BPB publications.
https://www.edutechlearners.com/computer-fundamentals-p-k-sinha-
free-pdf/
68

CS 109L Computer Fundamentals and

Programming Lab
Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 4 2

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
• Perform internal and external DOS commands.
• Implement problems based on expressions containing constants,
variables and operators.
• Implement problems based on conditional statements, switch and
loops.
• Implement problems based on array, pointers, functions, files and
command line arguments.
Lab Exercise
1. Explore DOS & WINDOWS Operating System
2. Implement Following programs in ‘C’
i. Simple Programs
i. Arithmetic Calculation
ii. Formula Based Calculation
ii. Conditional Statements
i. Check odd-even, positive-negative
ii. Calculation of Division, Rank of student
iii. Solution of Quadratic Equations
iv. Menu Driven Programs
v. Programs using if and switch statement
iii. Looping
i. Sum of digits of number, reverse of number,
palindrome checking
ii. Table Generation
iii. Prime number checking, generation
iv. Calculation of GCD, LCM
69

v. Sum of various series, Fibonacci series, sin, cos, exp

etc.
vi. Pattern Drawing
iv. Programming with Arrays
i. Max, min & Average calculation
ii. Linear Search
iii. Binary Search
iv. Bubble Sort
v. Selection Sort
vi. Insertion Sort
vii. Merging
viii. Number System Conversion
ix. Matrix Manipulation- sum of row, column &
diagonal element
x. Display and sum of upper triangular, lower triangular
matrix elements
xi. Matrix Arithmetic (Addition, Subtraction,
Multiplication)
xii. String Manipulation
v. Pointers and Functions
i. Use of Functions the previous programs
ii. Use of pointers and function in array and string
processing
iii. Recursion-factorial, GCD, Fibonacci, Power, Tower
of Hanoi etc.
vi. Structures
i. Operations on Complex number
ii. Record storage, searching, sorting, generating reports
iii. Use of Union
70

EEE 101 Electrical Engineering

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Understand the importance of electrical engineering
• Solve complex DC circuits
• Solve& predict the behavior of AC circuit
• Understand different machines along with measurement techniques
• Select appropriate element, device or machines with respect to
application
Section A
DC Networks: Node Voltage and Mesh Current Analysis; Source
Conversion. Superposition Theorem, Thevenin’s Theorem, Norton’s
Theorem, Maximum power Transform, Laplace transforms and inverse
Laplace transforms: Basic Theorem and Circuit analysis using Laplace
transformations, Initial and final value theorem.
Section B
Single Phase AC Circuits: EMF Equation, Average, RMS and Effective
Values. RLC Series, Parallel and Series, Parallel Circuits, Complex
Representation of Impedances. Phasor Diagram, Power and Power Factor.
Three Phase A.C. Circuits: Delta-Star and Star-Delta Transformation, Line
& Phase Quantities, 3-Phase Balanced Circuits, Phasor diagram,
Measurement of Power in Three Phase Balanced Circuits.
Section C
Transformer: Magnetic coupled circuits, Dot convention for coupled
circuits, coefficient of coupling, mutual inductance, EMF Equation, Voltage
& Current, Relationship and Phasor Diagram of Ideal Transformer.
Introduction to principle of DC Machines, synchronous machines and
induction motors.
Text Books
1. Toro, V. D. (1989). Electrical Engineering Fundamentals (2nd ed.).
PHI Publication.
71

2. Bobrow, L. S. (1996). Fundamental of Electrical Engineering(2nd ed.).

Oxford Publication.
3. Nagrath,J. &Kothari,D.P. (2017).Basic Electrical Engineering(3rd
ed.).India: TMH.
4. Sahdev,S. K. (2015). Basic Electrical Engineering. India:
PearsonEducation India.
Reference Books
1. Chakrabarti,A.K. (2018). Circuit Theory (7th ed.). Dhanpat Rai and Co.
2. Alaxender, C. &Sadiku, M. N. O. (2003). Fundamentals of Electrical
circuits. Oxford University Press.
3. Choudhary, D. R. (2013). Networks and Systems. Wiley Eastern Ltd.
4. Hayt, W. H., Kemmerly, J.&Durbin,S. M. (2013). Engineering Circuit
analysis(8th ed.).Tata Mc Graw Hill.
5. Valkenburg, M.E.V.(2006). Network Analysis. New Delhi: Prentice
Hall.
E-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108108076/
2. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-
science/
3. https://swayam.gov.in/electrical/c/4/engineering
4. https://swayam.gov.in/courses/4746-july-2018-fundamentals-of-
electrical-engineering
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105053/pdf/L-
03(GDR)(ET)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf
6. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105053/pdf/L-
04(GDR)(ET)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf
7. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105053/pdf/L-
06(GDR)(ET)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf
8. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105053/pdf/L-
07(GDR)(ET)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf
9. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105053/pdf/L-
08(GDR)(ET)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf
10. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105053/pdf/L-
14(NKD)(ET)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf
72

11. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105053/pdf/L-
15(NKD)(ET)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf
12. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105053/pdf/L-
17(NKD)(ET)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf
13. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105053/pdf/L23(TB)(ET)%20((EE)NPT
EL).pdf
14. https://www.scribd.com/doc/123459017/basic-electrical
engineering?campaign=SkimbitLtd&ad_group=725X1342X724adc86f
b3fde3cdc1f294ab4f382ea&keyword=660149026&source=hp_affiliate
&medium=affiliate

EEE 101L Electrical Engineering Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 4 2

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Handle measuring instruments and apparatus
• Identify the various electrical and electronic components as per the
ratings
• Verify circuit laws and solve electrical networks
• Analyze the characteristics of semiconductor devices
• Design basic AC & DC circuits
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of electronic components and apparatus.
2. Study ofdigital& analog Multimeter.
3. Study of Cathode Ray Oscilloscope (CRO)
4. Verification of principle of Superposition Theorem with DC.
5. Verification of principle of Thevenin’s theorem with DC.
6. Verification of principle of Norton’s theorem with DC.
7. Verification of principle of Maximum Power Transfer with DC.
8. Determine the frequency response of current in RL & RC circuit.
73

9. Determine the frequency response of current in RLC circuit.

10. Study of VI characteristics of PN junction diode.
11. Study ofVI characteristics of Zener diode.
12. Study ofVI characteristics of LED, LDR and Photodiode.
13. Study of VI characteristics of BJT in CE configuration.

ENGG 101L Engineering Drawing and Graphics Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 6 3

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Apply the concepts of engineering drawing in their respective field of
interest.
• Implement various BIS and ISO concepts of drawing.
• Draw the sectional views of various engineering objects.
• Use engineering curves in tracing the paths of simple machine
components.
• Draw various views related to real objects.
• Draw and read plan of industrial standards.
• Visualize the design ideas using software.
Indian Standard –Drawing Instruments, Lines & Lines symbols; Sheet
Layout of rules of printing; Line sections & Conventions, Lettering, Scales,
Curved used in Engineering Practice, Projection of Points, Projection of
Lines, Projection of Planes, Projection of Solids, Orthographic Projections,
Sectional Views, Rivets & Riveting Joints, Threads, Foundation Bolts &
Nuts.
Computer Aided Drawing using Auto CAD /MICRO STATION.
Text Books:
1. Gill,P. S. (2010).Engineering Drawing. Kataria Publication,.
2. Bhatt,N. D. & Panchal, V.M. (2011). Geometrical and Machine
Drawing (19th ed.). Charotar Publication.
74

e-Resources:-
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103019/
2. http://www.me.umn.edu/courses/me2011/handouts/drawing/blanco-
tutorial.html
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-007-design-and-
manufacturing-i-spring-2009/related-
resources/drawing_and_sketching/
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104172/
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Drawing sheet related to lettering.
2. Drawing sheet related to scale.
3. Drawing sheets related to conic sections.
4. Drawing sheets related to Engineering Curves.
5. Drawing sheet related to Projection of points.
6. Drawing sheet related to Projection of lines.
7. Drawing sheet related to orthographic projection by 1st angle.
8. Drawing sheet related to orthographic projection by 3rd angle.
'

ENGG 103L Measurement Techniques Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 6 3

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
• Demonstrate an understanding of different adulteration and qualitative
analysis of biomolecules.
• Develop understanding working with microscope.
• Learn a basic concept of plant identification and vegetational analysis.
• Gain hand on training to check purity of biomolecules.
Biology
1. To test for adulteration in turmeric, wheat flour, ghee and milk.
75

2. Qualitative analysis of nitrate, carbonate and replaceable base

deficiency in soil samples.
3. Determination of soil pH.
4. Biochemical test for sugar, albumin and ketone bodies in urine
samples.
5. Biochemical tests for lipids and cholesterol.
6. Detection of Vitamin A in the given sample.
7. Study of typical prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells with the help of a
microscope.
8. Gram staining to identify gram positive and gram negative bacteria
9. Description of plant identification (Neem, Babool, Peeli Kaner, Tulsi
& Chandani, Aak/ Madar).
10. Vegetational analysis by Quadrat method.
11. Determination of concentration and purity of DNA.
12. Determination of concentration and purity of RNA.
13. Preparation of stained temporary mount of onion peel.
Suggested Books:
➢ Biradar, V.K., & Samshe, A. (2016). Practical Biochemistry. New
Delhi: APH Publishing Corporation.
➢ Sharma, S., & Sharma, R. (2016). Practical Manual of Biochemistry
(2nd ed.). New Delhi: Medtech.
➢ Vats, S. (2015). A laboratory Text book of Biochemistry, Molecular
Biology and Microbiology. Germany: GRIN Verlag.
➢ Yadav, V.K., & Yadav, N. (2018). Biochemistry & Biotechnology: A
Laboratory Manual. Jaipur: Pointer Publisher.

MATH 209 Complex Variables

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
76

• Demonstrate understanding of the basic concepts underlying complex

variables.
• Explain the essential concepts of complex functions and their role in
today’s mathematics and applied contexts.
• Demonstrate precise and proficient use of complex functions continuity,
differentiability.
• Demonstrate capacity for mathematical reasoning through analyzing
analytic functions.
• Apply problem-solving using complex analysis techniques applied to
diverse situations in physics, engineering and other mathematical
contexts.
Section A
Complex functions; Exponential function, Trigomometric and hyperbolic
function, Polar form, branch cuts.Continuity, Differentiability, Analytic
function, Cauchy-Riemann equations, Harmonic functions.
Section B
Conformal map, Bilinear Transformation, Line integral in complex plane,
Cauchy's Integral theorem, Cauchy's integral formula, Derivative of
analytic functions, Power series, Taylor's series, Laurent series,
Section C
Singularities, Residue, Residue theorem and Evaluation of real integrals.
Fourier series, half-range expansions, Fourier integrals, Fourier transforms:
Fourier sine and cosine transform, Inverse Fourier transforms.
Suggested Books:
1. Kasana, H. S. (2005).Complex Variables: Theory and Applications
(2nd ed.). India, Delhi:PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
2. Ramana, B.V. (2015), Higher Engineering Mathematics (25th
ed.).India, Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Co. Ltd.
3. Kreyszig, E. (2011). Advanced Engineering Mathematics (9thed.).
Hoboken, NJ : John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Suggested E-Learning Material:
1. Complex Analysis
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111103070/
77

MATH 210 Differential Equations

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
• Identify, analyse and subsequently solve physical situation’s whose
behaviour can be described by ordinary differential equations.
• Solve systems of linear differential equations.
• Solve and interpret first order differential equations arising in problems
related to newtonian mechanics, heat conduction, and fluid mixing.
• Apply partial differential techniques to solve the engineering problems.
Section A
Ordinary differential equation of the 1st order and 1st degree; Ordinary
linear differential equation of nth order- homogeneous and non-
homogeneous with constant coefficient; Euler Cauchy differential
equations, Variation of parameters, Methods of undetermined coefficients,
System of linear differential equations.
Section B
Power series solutions of ordinary differential equations,Frobenius Method,
Legendre equation and Legendre polynomials, Bessel equations and Bessel
functions of first and second kind.
Laplace transform and its properties; Convolutions, Inverse Laplace
transform, application of Laplace transform for solving ordinary differential
equations.
Section C
Partial differential equations of first order, homogeneous and non-
homogeneous linear partial differential equations with constant coefficients,
Classification of second order Partial differential equations; Solution of one
dimensional wave and heat equation, solution of Laplace equation
Suggested Books:
1. Ramana, B.V. (2017). Higher engineering mathematics. Mc Graw Hill.
2. Kreyszig, E. (2005). Advance engineering mathematics. Wiley Eastern.
78

3. Zill, D.G. (2013). A first course in differential equation with modeling

application. Cengage Learning.
Suggested E-Learning Material:
1. Differential Equations for Engineers
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111106100/
2. Differential Equations
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/18-03-differential-equations-
spring-2010/
3. Differential Equations
https://freevideolectures.com/course/3302/differential-equations-i
4. Differential Equations
https://www.khanacademy.org/math/differential-equations

ENGG 201 Structure and Properties of Materials

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
The students will be able to:
• Relate fundamentals of material properties with its utilization
• Design and develop better products and equipment
• Identify needs and applications of materials economically.
Section A
Atomic bonding in solids: covalent ionic & Van der Waal bonding; Metallic
structures: unit cells, crystal systems, crystallographic directions and
Miller-Bravais indices, linear and planar densities, close-packed crystal
structures; Polymer structure: molecular weight, molecular configurations
of polymer; Defects and dislocations: vacancies and interstitials
dislocations, grain boundaries; Mechanical test behaviour of metals: elastic
and plastic deformation; Chemical properties: corrosion.
79

Section B
Deformation mechanisms: slip system, plastic deformation, strengthening
mechanisms; Diffusion; Phase diagram: phases, micro structure, phase
equilibrium, Iron-carbon system: Fe-Fe3C phase diagram, development of
microstructure in Fe-C alloys, mechanical behaviour of Fe-C alloy,
Tempered Martensite; Kinetics of phase transformations: Avrami rate
equation, correlation of properties to microstructure, isothermal
transformation diagram, continuous cooling transformation.
Section C
Dielectric materials: polarisation phenomenon, spontaneous polarisation,
dielectric constant and loss, piezo and ferro electricity; Magnetic materials:
dia, para, ferroand ferrimagnetism; soft and hard magnetic materials and
their applications; Conductive materials: electrical properties of conductive
and resistive materials, important characteristics and electronic applications
of specific conductive & resistive materials; Semiconductor materials:
crystal growth, zone refining, degenerated and non-degenerated
semiconductors, direct and indirect band-gap semiconductors.
Recommended Books:
1. Callister, W. D., & Rethwisch, D. G. (2018). Materials science and
engineering: An introduction.
2. Shackelford, J. F. (2014). Introduction to materials science for
engineers. Pearson.
3. Viswanathan B. (2006). Structure and properties of solid state
materials. Alpha Science Intl. Ltd .
4. Budinski, K. G., & Budinski, M. K. (2016). Engineering materials:
Properties and selection. New Delhi: Pearson India Education.
E-resource(s): https://nptel.ac.in
80

ENGG 202 Basic Electronics

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Understand the fundamental of semiconductors and design
semiconductor circuits.
• Understand the different type of diode/ transistors with their
responses.
• Analyze various types of oscillators available with their utilization.
Section A
Electronics component- Active & Passive components, Types of resistors,
inductors & capacitors, Recapitulation of semiconductor, Intrinsic and
Extrinsic Semiconductor, Charge density of semiconductors generation and
recombination of charges, diffusion, the continuity equation, Injected
minority carrier charges, potential variation with in a graded semiconductor,
Potential variation in step graded junction, PN Junction diode, current
components, volt Ampere characteristic-temperature dependency, space
charge & diffusion capacitance, switching time
Section B
Breakdown diode, Tunnel diode, LED, Photo diode, load line, clipping,
clamping. The junction Transistor, current, components, configuration -
CB, CE, CC, Typical junction values, Ebers-Moll model, photo transistor,
analysis of transistor amplifier using h parameter Transistor Hybrid Model,
, Emitter follower, Darlington pair, Miller theorem & its Dual, cascading
amplifier
Section C
Biasing and stabilization - Static & Dynamic, Bias stability, load line, Need
of stabilization, self-bias, fixed bias, emitter bias, feedback bias, Transistor
as an Inverter, brief introduction of different coupling techniques
FET- Pinch off, V-I characteristics, MOSFET- Depletion & Enhancement
type, Oscillators- Barkhausen criterion, phase shift oscillator, General form
of oscillator circuit - Colpitts, Hartley, Wein bridge, crystal oscillator
81

Recommended Books:
1. Millman. J, Halkias. C, Parikh. C. (2017). Integrated Electronics.
(2/e). New Delhi: TMH Publications.
2. Boylestad.R. (2012). Electronic Devices& Circuits Theory.(6/e). New
Delhi: Pearson Publications.
3. Somanathan B. Nair. (2006). Electronics Devices and Applications.
New Delhi: Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited
4. Smith. S.(2008). Microelectronics Circuits. (5/e). New Delhi: Oxford
press, India.
5. Streetman Ben. G. (2006). Solid State Electronic Devices (6/e). New
Delhi: PHI Publications.
Suggested E-resources:
1. Basic Electronics by Prof. Pramod Agarwal, Department of Electrical
Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Roorkee.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117107095/4
2. Circuits and Electronics by Anant Agarwal, Massachusetts Institute
of Technology: MIT OpenCourseWare.
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-
science/6-002-circuits-and-electronics-spring-2007/video-
lectures/6002_l16.pdf

CS 209 Data Structures

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
• Develop knowledge of basic data structures for storage and retrieval
of ordered or unordered data. Data structures include: arrays, linked
lists, stacks, queues, binary trees, heaps.
• Develop knowledge of applications of data structures including the
ability to implement algorithms for the creation, insertion, deletion,
searching, and sorting of each data structure.
82

• Analyze and compare algorithms for efficiency using Big-O notation.

• Describe the concept of dynamic memory management, data types,
algorithms, Big O notation.
• Apply Algorithm for solving problems like sorting, searching,
insertion and deletion of data.
Section A
Concept of data types, Abstract data type, Data structures, running time of a
program, asymptotic notations: Big-Oh, Theta, Little-oh, Omega. Linear
data structures: Static implementation of stack, queue, and their applications
Searching and Sorting: Linear search and Binary Search, Bubble sort,
Selection sort, Insertion sort, Quick sort, Radix sort.
Section B
Linked List: Linear, doubly or two way, circular, header and various
operations; Representation of polynomial using linked list, addition and
subtraction of polynomials. Dynamic implementation of stacks and queues.
Dynamic memory management: fixed and variable block storage, storage
techniques: first-fit, best-fit, worst-fit, next-fit; data compaction, and
garbage collection.
Section C
Non linear data structures: Tree concepts, General Tree, binary tree and
types, binary search tree, implementation of various operations on Binary
Search Tree (tree traversal, searching, insertion and deletion, counting leaf
and non-leaf nodes, height), Heap and heap sort, Balanced tree: concepts,
rotations, insertion and deletion.
Suggested Books:
1. Langsam, Y., Augenstein, M., & Tenenbaum, A. M. (1996). Data
Structures using C and C++. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
2. Tremblay, J. P., & Sorenson, P. G. (1976). An introduction to data
structures with applications. New York: McGraw-Hill.
3. Horowitz, E., Sahni, S., & Anderson-Freed, S. (2008). Fundamentals
of data structures in C.Universities Press: Computer Science.
4. Aho, A. V., Hopcroft, J. E., & Ullman, J. D. (1983). Data Structures
and algorithms. Addison Wesley Publishing Company.
83

Suggested E-Learning Material:

1. Programming and Data Structures
https://swayam.gov.in/course/1407-programming-and-data-structures
2. Data Structures and Program Methodology
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106103069/

CS 209L Data Structures Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 4 2

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course students will be able to :
• Implement problems based on basic data structures like stack and
queues.
• Implement problems on linked lists.
• Implement problems for performing different operations like insertion,
deletion and searching on binary tree and binary search tree.
Lab Number Problems
L1-L4 Implementation of stack, Applications of stacks
(parenthesis checker, postfix evaluation, infix to
postfix), recursion
L5-L7 Implementation of linear, circular, circular queue,
priority queue
L8-L12 Implementation of linear link list (creation, traversal,
insertion, deletion, searching, sorting, merging,
reverse)
L13-L14 Implementation of circular link list (creation,
traversal, insertion, deletion, searching, sorting)
L15-L16 Implementation of doubly link list (creation, traversal,
insertion, deletion, searching, sorting)
L17 Linked representation of stack and queue
L18 Polynomial arithmetic (Addition, Subtraction)
84

L19-L30 Implementation of binary search tree

(creation, traversal, insertion, deletion, searching),
Non recursive traversal (inorder, preorder, postorder)

CS 214 Object Oriented Programming

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course students will be able to :
• Describe the features of C++ supporting object oriented programming.
• Explain the relative merits of C++ as an object oriented Programming
language.
• Describe how to apply the major object-oriented concepts to implement
object oriented programs in C++, encapsulation, inheritance and
polymorphism.
• Apply advanced features of C++ specifically stream I/O, templates and
operator overloading
• Apply other features of the C++ language including templates, forms of
casting, conversions, and file handling.
Section A
Basic Concept of Object Oriented Programming: Need of OOP, advantage
over other programming paradigms, Tokens, Keywords, Identifiers and
Constants, Basic Data Types, Control Structures.
Functions: Call by Value, Call by Reference, Function Overloading.
Class & Objects: Concepts of Objects & Classes, declaring multiple
objects, array of objects, Friend Functions.
Section B
Constructors and Destructors: Introduction, Default, Parameterized and
Copy Constructor, Concept and use of destructors.
Operator Overloading: Overloading Unary Operators, Overloading Binary
Operators.
85

Inheritance: Derived and Base Class, Public, Private, Protected, Multiple

and Multilevel Inheritance, Function Overriding.
Pointers: Pointers to Objects, this Pointer, Virtual Functions,
Polymorphism.
Section C
Console I/O: Concept of Streams, Hierarchy of Console stream Classes,
Unformatted and formatted I/O Operations, Managing Output with
Manipulators
Templates: Class and function templates, overloading of function templates
File Handling: Classes for file stream operations, open and close a file,
EOF, file modes, file pointers and their manipulators, sequential I/O
operations, updating a file-Random access, Error Handling During File
Operation.
Suggested Books:
1. Balagurusamy, E. (2001). Object Oriented Programming with C++,
6e. Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
2. Schildt, H. (2003). C++: The complete reference. McGraw-Hill.
3. Lafore, R. (1997). Object-oriented programming in C++. Pearson
Education.
4. Stroustrup, B. (2000). The C++ programming language. Pearson
Education India.
5. Venugopal, K. R. (2013). Mastering C++. Tata McGraw-Hill
Education.
Suggested E-Learning Material:
1. Stroustrup, B. (2000). The C++ programming language. Pearson
Education India.
http://www.stroustrup.com/C++.html
2. Programming in C++
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105151/
86

CS 214L Object Oriented Programming Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 4 2

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course students will be able to
• Implement problems based on expressions, arrays and strings.
• Carry out problems using functions, class, constructor and destructor.
• Implement problems using pointers, operator overloading, inheritance,
file handling and exception handling.
Lab Number Problems
1-8 Implementation of simple problems with the Objects and
class. Understanding of private, public and protected
access using problem, Implementation of static variable &
static member function.Constructors & destructors.
Problems using friend function.
9 Implementation of polymorphism.
10 Implementation of inheritance
11-16 Implementation of operator overloading to overload
various operators: unary operators (+, -, *, % etc) and
binary operators: +, *, [ ], >> and << operators on
vectors
17-18 Problem related with dynamic binding. Problems using
this pointer
19-20 Problems related with the templates function and
template classes.

EEE 203 Network Analysis & Synthesis

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
87

• Analyze circuits using circuit laws.

• Develop the understanding of the circuit theorems in network
reduction.
• Understand the behavior of various circuit elements in transient
conditions and evaluate the responses
• Analyze the different types of network functions by identifying poles
and zeros
• Characterization of a two port network
Section A
Circuit fundamentals and analyzing tools: Review of basics of DC
network, Graph theory, tree, Loop and Nodal Analysis, tie set matrix,
incidence matrix.
AC Network Theorems: Thevenin’s, Norton’s, Superposition, Reciprocity,
Tellegen’s, Millman’s and Maximum power transfer theorem, Duality,
method of obtaining dual network.
Section B
Transient behavior and initial condition: LTI System, complex
frequency, behavior of circuit elements under switching condition and their
representation, evaluation of initial and final conditions in RL, RC and RLC
circuit for AC and DC excitation.
Applications of Laplace Transform for electrical circuit: Review of
Laplace transforms, solution of circuits, response of networks to step, ramp,
impulse, exponential and sinusoidal inputs. Waveform Synthesis.
Section C
Two Port Networks: Network parameters-Z, Y, ABCD and h-parameter,
properties of driving point transfer functions, interconnection and
cascading of two port networks, ladder and lattice networks, T and π
representation.
Network Synthesis: Realization of RL, RC and RLC, significance of poles
and zeros, physical realization, Hurwitz criterion, Foster and Cauer
realization, ladder development.
Text Books
1. Valkenburg,M.E.V.(2006). Network Analysis. Prentice Hall.
88

2. Malley, J.O. (2011). Schaum’s outline of Basic Circuit Analysis.

Mcgraw Hill.
Reference Books
1. Chakrabarti,A.K. (2018). Circuit Theory (7th ed.). Dhanpat Rai and Co.
2. Alaxender, C.&Sadiku, M. N. O. (2003). Fundamentals of Electrical
circuits. Oxford University Press.
3. Choudhary, D. R.(2013). Networks and Systems. Wiley Eastern Ltd.
4. Wadhwa,C.L.(2007).Network Analysis and Synthesis, New Age
international Publishers.
5. Scott,D. E. (1987). An Introduction to Circuit Analysis: a system
approach. Mcgraw hill.
E-Resources:-
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102042/
2. https://www.edx.org/course/circuits-electronics-1-basic-circuit-mitx-
6-002-1x-0
3. https://www.coursera.org/learn/linear-circuits-ac-analysis
4. https://swayam.gov.in/course/3868-networks-and-systems
5. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/307984500_Circuits_and_N
etworks_Analysis_Design_and_Synthesis_2e
6. http://www.covasa.cl/network-analysis-and-synthesis-by-franklin-f-
kuo-solutions-free.pdf
7. http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/11/circuit-theory.html

EEE 203L Network Analysis and Synthesis Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Identify, formulate and solve electrical network
• Analyse behavior of circuit elements
89

• Calculation of impedance and admittance parameters of a given

network
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. To verify the Kirchhoff’s Current law.
2. To verify the Kirchhoff’s Voltage law.
3. To verify the Superposition theorem.
4. To verify the Thevenin’s theorem.
5. To verify the Norton’s theorem
6. To verify the Reciprocity theorem.
7. To verify the maximum power transfer theorem.
8. To verify the Millman’stheorem.
9. To verify the Tellegen’s theorem
10. To determine two port network parameters using π network.
11. To determine two port network parameters using T network.

ELE 206 Digital Electronics

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Have a thorough understanding of the fundamental concepts and
techniques used in digital electronics.
• To understand, analyze and design various combinational and
sequential circuits, Counters and registers.
• To design state machine diagrams and applications of Logic families
• Utilize the knowledge of memory devices and ADC/DAC in digital
design applications.
Section -A
Review of Number Systems, Binary arithmetic & codes. Logic Gates:
Logic Gates and Boolean Algebra Representation and Simplification of
90

functions by Map methods, minimal function and their properties,

tabulation procedure for determination of prime implicates, the prime
implicant chart. Combinational Circuits design. Adder, Subtractor,
Decoder, Demultiplexer, Encoder, Multiplexer, Comparator, three state
devices, Exclusive-OR gates and parity circuits.
Section- B
Sequential Logic Circuit & Design – latches and flip flop, synchronous
sequential circuits – finite state model, memory elements and their
Excitation function, clocked synchronous state machine analysis and
design, asynchronous and synchronous counters, state reduction and
assignment, design procedure and design of counter, shift register.
Section- C
Digital Logic Families and Their Characteristics: RTL, DTL, TTL,
Schotlky TTL, ECL, MOS and CMOS, Fan in, Fan out.
Semiconductor Memories: RAM, ROM, PROM, EPROM, BJTRAM Cell,
MOS RAM Cell, and Organization of RAM.
D/A Converter: Weighted resistance D/A, R-2R Ladder Converter. DAC
0800 D/A Chip, D/A Converter specification. A/D Converter: Analog to
Digital Converter, Parallel Comparator Converter, Counting Converter,
Successive Approximation Converter, Dual Slop converter, A/D converter
specification, sampling and hold circuit.
Text Books:
1. Kumar, A.A. (2016). Fundamental of Digital Circuits(4th ed.).New
Delhi: PHI.
2. Floyd, T.L.(2011).Digital Fundamentals (8thed.).Pearson Education.
3. Kharate, G.K. (2010). Digital Electronics (5th ed.).Oxford University
Press.
4. Bignell, J. & Donovan, R. (1999) Digital Electronics Logic and
Systems.Cengage Learning.
5. Malvino, A.P. & Leach, D.P. (2011).Digital Principles and
Applications (8thed.). McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
1. Mano, M. Morris.(2007). Digital Logic and Computer Design.
Pearson Education.
91

2. Malvino, A. P. &Brown,J. (2017). DigitalComputer Electronics (3rd

ed.). Tata McGraw Hill.
e-Resources:-
1. https://www.educba.com/course/online-digital-electronics-courses/
2. https://www.coursera.org/learn/digital-systems
3. https://www.udemy.com/topic/digital-electronic/
4. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_ee09/preview
5. https://swayam.gov.in/course/1392-digital-circuits-and-systems
6. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108099/Digital%20Systems.pdf
7. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106114/Week%202%20Slides/2.1Unive
rsality.pdf
8. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101091/Week%2010%20Slides.pdf
9. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-
science/6-002-circuits-and-electronics-spring-2007/
10. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-
science/6-002-circuits-and-electronics-spring-2007/video-lectures/

ELE 201L Digital Electronics Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• The students will become competent enough to identify different
digital integrated circuits utilized in complex electronic circuits.
• Students will have the ability to put together the knowledge of
combinational logic circuits in designing of real time applications.
• The students will become proficient in designing of basic memory
elements and their applications.
• Students will have the ability to implement various real life
applications using asynchronous sequential logic circuits.
92

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. To verify the truth table of various Logic gates.
2. To implement the X-OR gate with the help of Universal Gate -NAND.
3. To implement the X-NOR gate with the help of Universal Gates -
NOR.
4. Verification of theorems of Boolean algebra.
5. Study of Binary Adder &Subtractor (Half).
6. Study of Binary Full Subtractor.
7. Study of Binary Full Adder.
8. Study of Multiplexer (2*1) and Demultiplexer (1*2) circuits.
9. Study of Decimal to Binary Decoder (2*4) and Encoder (4*2).
10. Study and designing with the help of gates of flip-flops (SR, D).
11. Study and designing with the help of gates of flip-flops (JK, T).
12. Study and designing with the help of gates of circuit of given Binary
Up asynchronous counter.
13. Study and designing with the help of gates of circuit of given Binary
Down asynchronous counter.

EIE 204 Electrical and Electronics Measurements

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Student will analyze the performance of industrial measurement
systems.
• Student will identify different type of transducers used in various real-
time processes.
• Measurement of various electrical quantities can be carried out by
students.
• Student will be able to design the bridge circuits used in measurement
task.
93

• Systems will have ability to operate different waveform analyzers and

Cathode ray oscilloscope employed for measurement of electrical
qualities.
Section A
Measurements: Elements of Measurements, Performance characteristics,
Error in measurements, True value, Static error, Static correction, Scale
range, Scale span, Reproducibility, Drift, Repeatability, Accuracy and
Precision, Indication of Precision, Significant figures, Range of doubt,
Static sensitivity, Linearity, Hysteresis, Threshold, Dead Time, Dead zone,
Resolution and Discrimination.
Measurement error: Types and analysis, Loading error due to series and
shunt connected instruments, Standards and Calibration, Curve fitting,
Dynamic characteristics of measurement systems, Mathematical models of
measurement system (Mechanical and Electrical System).
Transducers: Classification and characteristics, Resistive, Capacitive,
Inductive, Hall Effect. Measurement of Displacement: LVDT and RVDT,
Strain Gauges and its types.
Measurement of Temperature: RTD, Thermistor and Thermocouples.
Section B
D’Arsonval Galvanometer- Construction, Torque Equation and Dynamic
behavior of galvanometers, PMMC Instrument- Construction, Torque
equation, Ammeter shunts, Voltmeter multipliers, Ohmmeter- Series and
Shunt type, Moving Iron Instruments, Electrodynamometer Instrument. AC
Bridges- Measurement of self-inductance (Maxwell’s Bridge, Hay’s Bridge,
Owen’s Bridge, Anderson’s Bridge), capacitance (De Sauty’s and Schering
Bridge) and frequency (Wien’s Bridge).
Section C
Measurement of low, medium and high resistance. Multimeter- Analog and
Digital, Function generator, Wave Analyzer, Spectrum Analyzer, Q-meter
and its applications, CRO- CRT, Time base generator, Measurement of
Phase and Frequency (Lissajous Patterns), types of CRO (Dual Trace, Dual
Beam, Sampling type and Storage CRO).
Text Books:
1. Sawhney, A. K. (2015). A Course in Electrical and Electronic
Measurements and Instrumentation. Dhanpat Rai Publication.
94

2. Jain, R.K. (2015). Mechanical and Industrial Measurements. Khanna

Publishers.
3. Nakra, B.C. &Choudhary, K.K. (2016). Instrumentation, Measurement
and Analysis (4th ed.). Tata McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
1. Doebelin, E. O. (1990). Measurement Systems:Application and Design
(4th ed.). Mcgraw Hill International.
2. Eckmann, D. P.(2006). Industrial Instrumentation. CBS Publishers
and Distributors.
3. Kalsi, H.S. (2017).Electronic Instrumentation(3rd ed.). Mcgraw Hill
Education.
4. Singh,S.K. (2017). Industrial Instrumentation and Control(3rd
ed.).Mcgraw Hill Education.
5. Rangan, C., Sharma, G. & Mani, V.S.V. (2017). Instrumentation:
Devices and systems(3rd ed.).Mcgraw Hill Education.
e-Resources:-
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106070/
2. https://swayam.gov.in/course/3764-industrial-instrumentation
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-
science/6-071j-introduction-to-electronics-signals-and-measurement-
spring-2006/download-course-materials/
4. http://www.bput.ac.in/lecture-notes
download.php?file=lecture_note_212311150212320.pdf

EIE 202L Electrical and Electronics Measurements Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Recognize various materials by employ different sensors.
• Understand the working of different types of sensors and its
applications.
95

• Student will be able to control and monitor industrial processes.

• Analyze various response of the system with the help of Digital
Storage Oscilloscope.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Material detection using Inductive sensor and to calculate its switching
hysteresis.
2. Material identification using Capacitive sensor and calculate its
Reduction factor.
3. Material recognition using Magnetic sensor and plot its switching
characteristics.
4. Material identification using Ultrasonic sensor and calculate its
switching hysteresis.
5. Object detection using Photo electric sensors and calculation of their
switching frequency.
6. Level detection with the help of Ultrasonic, Photo electric and
capacitive sensors.
7. Design of logical operations (AND & OR) using different type of
sensors.
8. Design of Wheatstone bridge and compute its unknown resistance.
9. To calculate the frequency and phase with Lissajous pattern using
DSO.

EIE 204L Electrical and Electronics Measurements Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes: After completion of this laboratory course, students

will be able to:
• Develop an understanding of construction and working of different
measuring instruments.
• Develop an ability to use measuring instruments and AC and DC
bridges for relevant measurement.
96

• Select appropriate passive or active transducers for measurement

of physical phenomenon.
List of experiments:
1. To study Hall Effect.
2. To study principle of Thermocouple.
3. To study principle of Load cell.
4. To study principle of Thermistor.
5. To study principle of strain guage.
6. To study Principle of LVDT
7. To study De Sauty bridge.
8. To study Wein AC bridge.
9. To study CRO circuitry in detail.

MCTR 201 Pneumatic Engineering

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• The students will be able to explain the detailed functioning of
Pneumatics Engineering.
• Students will be able to explain the properties of control elements
based upon physical principles, and the roles they play within the
system.
• By understanding and performing measurements on the pneumatic and
control circuits, students will learn and apply troubleshooting
strategies.
• To impart the knowledge of electro-pneumatics-systems.
• To impart the knowledge of Concepts, Design and Applications of
Pneumatics Engineering.
97

Section-A
Introduction to Pneumatic energy, Gas laws (Boyle’s law, Charles’ law,
Gay-Lussac’s law), Generalized gas equation,Preparation of compressed
air, Compressor and its type (Piston, Screw, Reciprocating, Rotary and
Axial), Air Storage System, Dryers, Maintenance and troubleshooting of
Pneumatic system.
Section-B
Elements of pneumatic system: Filter, Regulator and Lubricator (FRL) unit,
Direction Control Valves (DCV), Flow Control Valves (FCV), Pressure
Control Valves (PCV), Time delay, Quick Exhaust, Twin pressure and
Shuttle valves, Non-Return Valves (NRV), Pilot-operated check valves
Pneumatic Actuator: Linear, Rotary and Limited angle actuators
Classification and types of Cylinders, Cushioning, Seals, ISO symbols
Section-C
Electro-pneumatic circuits: solenoid valves, switches (push button, detent
and limit), relays, reed& proximity switches, Switch Mode Power Supply
(SMPS).
Direct and Indirect actuation, Development of single and multi actuator
circuits, speed control of cylinders, supply air throttling and Exhaust air
throttling.
Signal Processing Elements: Use of logic gates(OR and AND) in pneumatic
applications. Introduction to Vacuum Technology& its application.
Text Books:
1. Jagadeesha, T. (2015). Pneumatics: Concepts, Design and
Applications. Universities Press (India) Private Limited,
2. Sundaram, K.S.(2006). Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls:
Understanding made Easy. S. Chand Limited.
3. Majumdar,S.R. (1996). Pneumatic Systems: Principle and
Maintenance. Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
e-Resources:-
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105046/
2. https://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/
98

3. https://www.coursera.org/lecture/fluid-power/hydraulics-and-
pneumatics-SD8dv
4. http://www.180skills.com/manufacturing-skills-courses/pneumatics-
skills-courses/

MCTR 201L Pneumatic Engineering Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Explore fundamentals of pneumatics and identify the different types of
pneumatic system and circuit.
• Student will be able to assemble pumps and motors to rectify problems.
• Introduce efficient deign of pneumatic system.
• se software to simulate the pneumatic circuits.
• Build, Test and Troubleshoot pneumatic system.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1) Direct control of single and double acting cylinders.
2) Controlling double acting cylinder with impulse valve.
3) Logical (AND & OR) control with shuttle & twin pressure valve.
4) Operation of single and double acting cylinder using pilot operated
directional control valve.
5) Operation of double acting cylinder using relay and solenoid valve.
6) Apply AND, OR logic using solenoid valve and two manual controls
for forward stroke of a double acting cylinder.
7) Continuous operation of a double acting cylinder sing double solenoid
valve.
8) Simulation for condition monitoring of double acting cylinder.
9) Simulation of PID Controller in Feed Forward mode.
10) Operation of Double Acting Cylinder using PLC.
11) Study of vacuum technology.
99

ELE 202 Electromagnetic Field Theory

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, student will be able to:
• Apply vector calculus to static electric-magnetic fields in different
engineering situations.
• Analyze Maxwell’s equation in different forms (differential and
integral) and apply them to diverse engineering problems.
• Examine the phenomena of wave propagation in different media
and its interfaces and in applications of microwave engineering.
Section A
Elements of Vector calculus: Cartesian coordinate system, Circular-
Cylindrical coordinate system, Spherical coordinate system (dot product,
cross product, divergence & curl). Electrostatics: Electric Flux Density,
Coulomb's law, Gauss's law and their applications, Energy in electrostatic
fields, capacitance of parallel plate and coaxial cable, Fields in dielectrics,
Boundary conditions, dipole, Laplace's and Poisson's equations and their
applications.
Section B
Magnetostatics: Ampere's law, Bios wart's law and their applications,
Stock's theorem, Energy in magnetic field, Boundary conditions. Maxwell's
Equation: - Maxwell's equations in integral &differential form (Gauss's law
in electric and magnetic field, Ampere's circuital law, Faraday's law),
Maxwell's equations for time varying field.
Section C
Uniform Plane Waves: Wave equation and its solutions, Pointing vector,
propagation through various media-free space, conductor & dielectric,
Reflection and Refraction in conductors & Dielectrics with normal and
oblique incidence, Phase & Group velocity, Skin depth. Transmission
Lines: General equation, input impedance, characteristics impedance,
Reflection and reflection coefficient, Standing wave ratio, resonant and
resonant line impedance matching, Smith chart and its applications,
practical problems in transmission lines.
100

Text Books:
1. Sadiku,M. N. O., Kulkarni,S. V., (2009). Principles of
Electromagnetics. Oxford University Press.
2. William H. Hayt,(2017). Engineering Electromagnetics. McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
1. Jordan,E. C., Balmain,K. G. (1968). Electromagnetic Waves and
Radiating Systems. Pearson.
2. Kraus,J. D., Fleisch,D. A., (2017). Electromagnetics with Applications.
McGraw Hill.
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/downloads/115101005/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/downloads/108104087/
3. https://www.coursera.org/
4. https://swayam.gov.in/course/1361-introduction-to-electromagnetic-
theory
5. https://swayam.gov.in/courses/4907-july-2018-introduction-to-
electromagnetic-theory
https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-001-electromagnetic-fields-and-
energy-spring-2008/chapter-1/

EEE 306 Electrical Machines-I

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Understand the principle of electro-mechanical energy conversion
• Analyse the construction, classification and circuit model of DC
machines
• Analyse the characteristics of DC machines and obtain their
performance parameters
101

• Conduct various tests on the single phase transformer

• Apply various connection of three phase transformers for multiple
applications
Section-A
Principles of Electro-mechanical Energy Conversion: Introduction, flow
of Energy in electromechanical devices, energy in magnetic systems
(defining energy & Co-energy), Singly Excited Systems: Determination of
mechanical force, mechanical energy, torque equation, Doubly excited
Systems: Energy stored in magnetic field, electromagnetic torque,
Generated EMF in machines, torque in machines with cylindrical air gap.
Section-B
D.C. Machines: Construction of DC Machines, armature winding, EMF
and torque equation, armature reaction, commutation, interpoles and
compensating windings, performance characteristics of D.C. generators,
performance characteristics of D.C. motors, Starting of D.C. motors:3
point and 4 point starters, Speed control of D.C. motors: field control,
armature control and voltage control (Ward Lenonard method), Efficiency
and Testing of D.C. machines: Hopkinson’s and Swinburn’s Test.
Section-C
Single Phase Transformer: Phasor diagram, efficiency and voltage
regulation, all day efficiency,Testing of Transformers: O.C. and S.C.
tests, Sumpner’s test, polarity test.
Auto Transformer: Single phase Auto-transformer, volt-amp relation,
efficiency, Conversion of a two-winding Transformer to an Auto
transformer, saving in conductor material, advantages, disadvantages and
applications of autotransformers.
Three Phase Transformers: Construction, three-phase unit transformer
and bank of three single phase transformers with their advantages, three-
phase transformer groups (phasor groups) and their connections, Y-∆
connection, open delta connection, three-phase/two-phase Scott connection
and it’s application, Sumpner’s test, all day efficiency, polarity test
excitation phenomenon in Transformers, harmonics in Single phase and 3-
phase transformers, parallel operation and load sharing of single phase and
three phase transformers, three winding transformers, tertiary winding.
102

Text Books:
1. Nagrath, I. J. &Kothari, D. P. (2017), “Electrical Machines” (3rdEdn.),
Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Ashfaq , H. (2016), “Electrical Machines” (5thEdn.), Dhanpat Rai &
Sons.
3. Fitggerald, A. E., Kingsley Jr., C. and Umans (2009), “Electric
Machinery” (6thEdn), McGraw Hill, International Student Edition.
4. Gupta, B. R. &Singhal, V. (2005) “Fundamentals of Electrical
Machines” (3rdEdn.), New Age International.
Reference Books:
1. Kosow, I. L. (2009).Electric Machine and Tranformers (2ndEdn.).
Prentice Hall of India.
2. Say, M. G. (2005). The Performance and Design of AC machines
(4thEdn.), Pit man & Sons.
3. Guru, B. S. and Hizirogulu, H. R. (2001). Electric Machinery and
Transformers (3rdEdn.). Oxford University Press.
E-Resources:
1. https://eleccompengineering.files.wordpress.com/2014/08/stephen_cha
pman_electric_machinery_fundamentalsbookfi-org-1.pdf
2. http://solidviews.com/OaOY
3. https://kahrbjy.files.wordpress.com/2012/08/principles-of-electric-
machines-solution-manual.pdf

EEE 202L Electrical Machines-I Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Formulate and analyse working of DC machine and transformer
• Troubleshoot the operation of an electrical machine
103

• Select suitable measuring instrument for measurement of electrical

parameters
• Exposition of advanced methods of controlling electrical machines
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. To demonstrate basic safety measures in electrical system.
2. To study the operation of wiring system for in house loads.
3. To determine Power factor of R, L, C and RLC Circuit.
4. To obtain equivalent circuit and performance parameter of a single
phase transformer.
5. To demonstrate the parallel operation of single phase Transformer and
to obtain theload sharing at a particular load.
6. To control speed of DC series motor.
7. To control speed of DC separately excited motor.
8. To obtain losses &efficiency of compound motor-generator set.

ECE 201 Signals, Systems and Networks

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Analyze linear time invariant system in time and frequency ___domain
• Apply network theorem to analyze the electrical circuit.
• Explain two port parameters.
Section-A
Introduction: Continuous and discrete time signals, Transformation of
independent variables, Exponential and sinusoidal signals, Unit impulse and
unit step functions, Continuous and discrete time systems, Basic system
properties
Linear Time-Invariant System: Convolution for continuous and discrete
time LTI system, Properties of LTI system, Causal LTI systems described
by differential and difference equations, Singularity functions
104

Fourier Series: Fourier series representation of continuous time periodic

signals, Convergence of Fourier series, Properties of continuous time
Fourier series, Fourier series representation of discrete time periodic
signals, Properties of discrete time Fourier series
Section-B
Continuous Time Fourier Transform: Representation of a periodic signals,
Fourier transform for periodic signals, Properties of continuous time
Fourier Transform, Systems characterized by constant coefficient
differential equations
Laplace Transform: Laplace transform, Region of convergence for Laplace
transform, Inverse Laplace transform, Geometrical evaluation of Fourier
Transform from pole-zero plot, Properties of Laplace transform, Analysis
and characterization of LTI systems using Laplace transform
Initial Conditions in Networks: First order differential equations- General
and Particular solutions, Time constants, Initial conditions in elements,
geometrical interpretation of derivatives, A procedure to evaluate initial
conditions
Section- C
Differential equation in circuits: Second order equations-Internal
excitations, Networks excited by external energy sources, Response as
related to the s-plane ___location of roots, General solutions in Terms of S, Q,
ωn
Impedance Functions and Networks Theorems: The concept of complex
frequency, Transform impedance and transform circuits, Series and parallel
combinations of elements, Superposition and Reciprocity, Thevenin’s
Theorem and Norton’s Theorem
Two port Parameters: Relationship of two port variables, Short circuit
admittance parameters, Open circuit impedance parameters, Transmission
parameters, Hybrid parameters, Relation between parameter sets, Parallel
connection of two port networks
Recommended Books:
1. Oppenheim A. V., A. V. &Nawab S. H. (2015). Signal and Systems
(2/e), Boston: Pearson Publication
2. Valkenburg M.E. Van (2015). Network Analysis (3/e). New Delhi:
Pearson Publication
105

3. Proakis J. G. &Manolakis D. G. (2007). Digital Signal Processing:

Principles, Algorithms, and Applications (4/e). New Delhi: Pearson
Publication
4. Kuo F. F. (2010). Network Analysis and Synthesis (2/e). New Delhi:
John Wiley & Sons Publication
Suggested E-resources:
1. Circuit Theory by Prof. S.C. Dutta Roy, Department of Electrical
Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102042/
2. Principles of Signals and Systems by Prof. Aditya K. Jagannatham,
Department of Electrical Engineering Indian Institute of Technology,
Kanpur. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108104100

ECE 202S Seminar

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• To identify promising new directions of various cutting edge
technologies.
• Undertake a critical review of the literature.
• Deliver well-organized technical presentations and prepare a technical
report.

ELE 205 Semiconductor Devices and Circuits

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Explain the energy bands, temperature effects, carrier transport of
semiconductor devices
106

• Explain the switching times, capacitance of PN junction, bipolar and

unipolar transistor behavior and their differences
• Analyze the various feedback circuits and design power amplifiers.
Section A
P-N junction: thermal equilibrium condition, under forward and reverse
bias, space charge region, junction capacitance, p-n junction current, small
signal model, diode current equation, junction breakdown, charge storage
and transient behavior, metal semiconductor junction: Schottky Barriers
and Ohmic Contacts, heterojuntion: energy band diagrams
Section B
Bipolar Junction Transistor: the transistor action, minority carrier
distribution, low frequency common-base current gain, MOSFET: The
MOS diode, Energy band diagrams, MOSFET fundamentals, MOS
Transistor current, Threshold Voltage. FET biasing: fixed-Bias
configuration, self-Bias configuration, Voltage-divider Bias configuration,
FET small signal model, common source and common drain amplifiers.
Section C
Feedback amplifier: classifications of amplifiers, general feedback
structure, properties of negative feedback, feedback topologies, Transfer
gain with feedback, General Characteristics of negative feedback
amplifiers, Input resistance, output resistance, Voltage series and current
series feedback, Current shunt and voltage shunt feedback, Power
amplifiers: Classification, operation, Analysis and design of Class A, Class
B, Class-AB, Class C, Power dissipation and efficiency calculations,
amplifier distortion.
Recommended Books:
1. S. Simon. M.(2002), Semiconductor Devices Physics and Technology
(2/e) , New Jersey, USA: JOHN WILEY & SONS Publication
2. Millman. J, Halkias. C, Parikh. C. (2017). Integrated Electronics. (2nd
ed). New Delhi: TMH Publications.
3. Streetman Ben. G. (2006). Solid State Electronic Devices (6th ed) New
Delhi: PHI Publications.
4. Smith. S.(2008). Microelectronics Circuits. (5th ed). New Delhi:
Oxford press.
107

Suggested E-Resources:
1. Semiconductor Devices and Circuits by Prof. Sanjiv Sambandan,
Department of Instrumentation and Applied Physics, Indian Institute of
Science, Bangalore. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108108112/
2. Analog Electronic Circuits by Prof. S. C. Dutta Roy, Department of
Electrical Engineering Indian Institute of Technology Delhi.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102095/

ELE 205L Semiconductor Devices and Circuits Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes: After completion of this laboratory course, students

will be able to:
• Develop understanding of current voltage characteristics of various
semiconductor devices.
• Design and analyze the various electronic circuits such as amplifiers
and oscillators.
• Draw output waveforms of various clipper and clamper circuits.
List of Experiments:
1. To study the half wave and full wave rectifier circuit.
2. Measurement of bipolar junction transistor (BJT) characteristics.
3. Measurement of junction field effect transistors (JFET) characteristics.
4. To measure input and output characteristics and calculate gain of CE
amplifier circuit.
5. To measure input and output characteristics and calculate gain of CB
amplifier circuit.
6. To study the frequency response of RC coupled amplifier.
7. To study Wien-bridge oscillator circuit.
8. To study Hartley oscillator circuit.
9. To study the effects of negative feedback on the amplifier
characteristics.
108

10. Study of class A push-pull amplifier.

11. Study of class B push-pull amplifier.
12. To study clipper and clamper circuits.

ECO 307 Fundamentals of Economics

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 0 0 3

Learning Outcome:
Upon Completion of the course student will be able to:
• Understand various aspects of economics that affects the day today
functioning of business.
• Understand the concept of demand, supply and production and how the
same is related to market.
• Understand the basic financial concepts that affects the functioning of
the business.
Section A
What Economics is all about? Micro and Macro Economics.Origin and
meaning of Engineering Economics, Role of Economics in Engineering,
Scope of Engineering Economics.
Theory of Demand: Law of Demand, Demand Function and Determinants
of Demand, Types of Demand.
Elasticity of Demand: Concept, Types and Measurement.
Section B
Production function and Laws of Production.Optimal Input combination.
Cost concepts and cost output relationship.
Types of market structures; Determination of equilibrium price and output
under perfect competition.
Section C
Timevalue of Money and Project Evaluation: Interest Formulas; Cash Flow
Diagram; Principles of Economic Equivalance, Evaluation of Engineering
Projects using methods of Present Value and Internal Rate of Return.
109

Capital Budgeting: Concept and significance of capital budgeting.

Depreciation Analysis: Meaning and causes of depreciation; methods of
calculating depreciation – straightline and declining balance methods.
Books Recommended:
1. Thuesen. G.J., and Fabrycky, N.Engineering Economy, (9 ed) PHI
Learining Private Limited, New Delhi.
2. S. ParkChan: Contemporary Engineering Economics: 3rd Edition,
Prentice Hall.
3. M. Parkin: Economics: 5th Edition, Addison Wesley.
4. Mahendra P. Agasty: Engineering Economics and Costing, Second
Edition: Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd.
5. R. Panneerselvam: Engineering Economics, Tenth Printing: PHI
Learning Private Limited, New Delhi.

MGMT 310 Principles of Management

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 0 0 3

Learning Outcome:
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
• Evaluate the global context for taking managerial actions.
• Understand conflict resolution, motivation and leadership.
• Understand application of theories and management principles.
Section-A
What is management? Scientific approach-Taylor’s contribution,
administrative approach-Henry Fayol’s contribution, human relation
approach-Elton Mayo’s contribution, system approach.
Planning: Need and process, types of plans-goals, objectives, policies and
strategies; decision making-situations and process.
Section-B
Organizing: Organization structure, departmentation, centralization v/s
decentralization, span of management, delegation and power of authority.
110

Motivation-importance, theories of motivation-Maslow, McClleland

Herzberg, theories.
Section-C
Theories and styles of leadership-Trait, behavioral.
Communication: Process and principles, types of communication, barriers
to communication.
Control: Process of evaluation & control, method of control.
Suggested Reading:
1. Tripathi, P. C., & Reddy, P. N. (2017) Principles of Business
Management, (22ed.) Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi
2. Robbins & D. Cenzo. Fundamentals of Management (10ed), New
Delhi, Pearson Education Asia
3. Prasad,L.M.Principles and practice of Management (9ed) .Sultan
Chand & sons, New Delhi
4. Weihrich&Koonts. Management-A Global Perspective (13ed), Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi
Suggested E-Learning Material:
1. Prachi, J. (2016). Planning Function of Management. Retrieved from
Management Study Guide:
https://www.managementstudyguide.com/planning_function.htm
2. Amit,L. (2018, December). Controlling: Features,process and types.
Retrieved from: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JRVXfaFrMEM
3. Brian, T. (2017, May 11). Different Types of Leadership Styles.
Retrieved from: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vilZazhIjoc
4. Chandan,P (2017, September 26). Organising:Meaning,Process and
Types. Retrieved from
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XrmJG_8d9Cg
111

MATH 311 Numerical Methods

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course students will be able to
• Apply numerical methods to obtain approximate solutions to
mathematical problems.
• Analyze and evaluate the accuracy of common numerical methods.
• Solve the nonlinear equations, system of linear equations and
interpolation problems using numerical methods with error analysis.
• Examine the appropriate numerical differentiation and integration
methods to solve engineering problems.
• Analyze the appropriate numerical method to find the eigen values and
corresponding eigenvectors of a system.
• Apply the numerical methods to solve differential equations.
Section A
Errors analysis- Approximations and round off and truncation errors, Root
finding for nonlinear equations (transcendental and algebraic equations);
Iterative method, Bisection method, Regula-Falsi method, Newton
Raphson’s method, Order of convergence, Numerical methods for solving
system of linear equation, Ill-conditioning.
Section B
Finite differences, Interpolation, Newton’s formula for forward and
backward interpolation, Newton’s general interpolation formula,
Lagrange’s interpolation formula, Numerical differentiation.
Section C
Numerical integration; Newton’s cotes quadrature formula, Trapezoidal,
Simpson’s rules. Numerical solution of first and second order differential
equations, Euler’s method, Picard’s method, Runge-Kutta’s method.
Suggested Books:
1. Rao, K. S. (2006). Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers
(3rded.). PHI learning, India.
112

2. Ramana, B.V. (2015). Higher Engineering Mathematics (25th reprint).

McGraw Hill.
3. Kreyszig, E. (2011). Advanced Engineering Mathematics (9thed.).
Wiley Eastern.
Suggested E-Learning Material:
1. Introduction to Numerical Analysis for Engineering
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-993j-
introduction-to-numerical-analysis-for-engineering-13-002j-spring-
2005/index.htm
2. Numerical Analysis
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111107062/
3. Elementary Numerical Analysis
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111101003/

STAT 204 Probability and Statistical Methods

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course students will be able to
• Understand the concepts of random variables, probability distributions
and independence of random variables.
• Understand the meaning of probability and probabilistic experiment
• Familiarize with the all approaches to probability theory and
particularly, the axiomatic approach.
• Understanding the meaning of conditional probability.
• Distinguish between independent and uncorrelated random variables.
• Distinguish between discrete and continuous random variables and be
able to represent them using probability mass, probability density, and
cumulative distribution function.
113

• Identify important types of distributions such as exponential, Binomial,

Poisson, Normal, and use them as suitable models in basic science and
engineering problems.
• Understand the concept of statistical hypothesis and able to solve such
type of real life problems.
Section A
Basic concepts of Probability, Classical, Empirical and Axiomatic approach
to Probability. Addition and Multiplication theorems of Probability. Baye’s
theorem and its simple applications. Marginal, Joint and Conditional
probability. Mathematical Expectation: Expectation of sum & products of
random variables, Variance & Covariance.
SectionB
Correlation & Regression Karl Pearson coefficient of Correlation. Partial
and Multiple Correlation (upto three variables only).
Probability Distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Normal, Rectangular &
Exponential distributions with simple applications. Fitting of Binomial,
Poisson, and, Normal distributions.
Section C
Sampling distribution, Standard Error, Simple random sampling and
stratified random sampling with their role. Test of significance for mean,
variance, Proportion and correlation coefficient. Test of goodness of fit and
independence of attributes. Analysis of variance with one observation per
cell.
Suggested Books:
1. Johnson, R. A., Miller, I., & Freund, J. E. (2011). Probability and
Statistics for Engineers, Prentice Hall.
2. Goon, A. M., Gupta, B. D. & M. K. Gupta.(1980). Fundamental of
Statistics. (Vol. I & II).The World Press Pvt. Ltd. Kolkata.
3. Mood, A. M., Graybill, F. A., &Boes, D. C. (2001). Introduction to
Theory of Statistics (3rd ed.). McGraw- Hill International.
Suggested E-Learning Material:
1. Probability and Random variables
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/18-440-probability-and-
random-variables-spring-2014/lecture-notes/
114

2. Probability and Statistics

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111105041/27
3. Statistical Inference
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111105043/

ELE 311 Analog Integrated Circuit

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Student will be able to understand the design and working of transistor
amplifiers.
• Observe the effect of negative feedback on different parameters of an
amplifier and different types of topologies.
• Will have the potential to build and troubleshoot analog circuits.
• Understand the fundamentals and areas of applications of integrated
circuits.
• Demonstrate the ability to design practical circuits that perform the
desired operations.
SECTION A
Feedback Amplifiers: Classification of amplifiers,General feedback
structure, Properties of negative feedback, Feedback topologies, Transfer
gain with feedback, General characteristics of negative feedback amplifiers,
input resistance, output resistance, Methods of analysis: Voltage series and
current series feedback, current shunt and voltage shunt feedback.
Power Amplifiers: Classification, Operation, Analysis and design of Class
A, Class B, Class AB, Class C, Power dissipation and efficiency
calculations, Amplifier distortion.
SECTION B
High Frequency Amplifiers: Hybrid–pi CE transistor model, Hybrid –pi
conductance, Hybrid –pi capacitances, CE short circuit current gain,
115

Current gain with resistive load, Single stage CE transistor amplifier

response, Gain bandwidth product.
Multistage Amplifier: Frequency response, Effect of cascading on
bandwidth, RC coupled amplifier, Low frequency response of an RC
coupled stage, Effect of emitter bypass capacitor, High frequency response
of two cascaded CE transistor stages, Multistage CE amplifier cascaded at
high frequencies.
SECTION C
Operational Amplifier and its applications: BJT differential amplifier:
DC and AC analysis, Transfer characteristics, Differential and Common
mode gain. Ideal Op-amp, inverting and non inverting amplifier, offset
voltage, offset current, bias current, slew rate, CMRR, design of integrator
and differentiator, summing amplifier, differential and instrumentation
amplifier, Active filter, Op-amp RC oscillator circuits : Wien bridge, Phase
shift. Precision rectifier, comparator, Schmitt trigger and 555 IC Timer.
Text Books:
1. Millman, J., Halkias, C. & Parikh, C. (2017). Integrated Electronics
(2nd ed.). McGraw Hill Education.
2. Boylestad&Nashelsky, (2015). Electronic Devices and Circuit
Theory(11th ed.). Pearson Education India.
3. Gayakwad R. A. (2010). OP-AMP and linear integrated circuits (4th
ed.). New Delhi: Prentice Hall.
Reference Books:
1. Sedra, A. & Smith, K. (2009). Microelectronic Circuits: Theory and
Applications (5th ed.). Oxford University Press.
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106030/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106030/nptel-aic/analogicdesign-
intro.pdf
3. https://www.analog.com/en/education/education-
library/tutorials/analog-electronics.html
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106030/nptel-aic/analogicdesign-
intro.pdf
5. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ec05/preview
116

6. https://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/117106030/
7. https://www.electronics-tutorial.net/analog-integrated-circuits/
8. https://www.allaboutcircuits.com/textbook/experiments/chpt-
6/introduction-analog-integrated-circuits/

ELE 301L Analog Integrated Circuit Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Develop the skill to build, and troubleshoot Analog circuits.
• Student will be able to choose the appropriate integrated circuit
modules to build a given application.
• Evaluate possible causes of discrepancy in practical experimental
observations in comparison to theory.
• Examine the appropriate integrated circuit modules to build a given
application
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. To design the AstableMultivibrator using 555.
2. To design the MonostableMultivibrator using 555.
3. To design summer using 741 IC.
4. To design Integrator using 741 IC.
5. To design Schmitt Trigger using 741 IC.
6. To design Differentiator using 741 IC.
7. To design peak detector using 741 IC.
8. To design scalar using 741 IC.
9. To study Active Filters: LPF,HPF,BPF.
10. To design Voltage to frequency converter
11. To design phase locked loop.
12. To study frequency shift keying using PLL 565.
117

ELE 509 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Analyze the architecture, programming and interfaces for higher
versions of Microprocessor like 80286, 80386, Pentium.
• Evaluate the detailed working of microprocessor based computers and
development boards.
• Implement the interfacing of peripheral devices with Microprocessor
base in real time projects
• Utilize the architecture, programming and interfacing skills to build
projects using Microcontroller 8051
• Understand the concepts of industrial and real time embedded system
applications.
Section A
8086/8088 Microprocessor: Pin Assignment, Architecture, Functional
Diagram, Register Organization, Memory address space & data
organization, Segment registers & Memory segmentation, Dedicated &
general use of memory,
Addressing modes, Instructions,Functional schematic, Minimum and
Maximum mode operations of 8086,
8086 Control signals interfacing, Timing Diagrams, Interrupts, Bus timings,
Demultiplexing.
Assembly Language Programming of 8086: Instruction Format, Instruction
Set, Data Transfer instructions, Arithmetic instructions, Logical instruction,
Shift instructions, Rotate instructions, Flag control instructions, Compare
instructions, Jump instructions, Subroutine & the subroutine handling
instructions, Loop & loop handling instructions, String instructions.
118

Section B
Peripheral Devices and Their Interfacing:Introduction, memory and I/O
interfacing with 8086, data transfer schemes, programmable peripheral
interface (8255), programmable DMA controller (8257), programmable
interrupt controller (8259), programmable communication interface (8251),
programmable counter/interval timer (8253 and 8254), special purpose
interfacing devices, elements and circuits for interfacing.
Communication Interface: Serial Communication Standards, USART
Interfacing RS-232, IEEE-488, 20mA Current Loop, Prototyping and
Troubleshooting, Software Debugging tolls, MDS.
Section C
Introduction to Microcontrollers: Overview of 8051 Micro Controller,
Architecture, I/O ports and Memory Organization, Addressing modes and
Instruction set of 8051,
Simple Programs using Stack Pointer, Assembly language programming.
8051
Interrupts Communication: Interrupts, Timer/Counter and Serial
Communication, Programming Timer Interrupts, Programming External
H/W interrupts, Programming the serial communication interrupts, Interrupt
Priority in the 8051, Programming 8051 Timers, Counters and
Programming.
Interfacing & Industrial Applications: Applications of Micro Controllers,
Interfacing 8051 to LED’s, Push button, Relay’s and Latch Connections,
Keyboard Interfacing, Interfacing Seven Segment Display, ADC and DAC
Interfacing.
Text books:
1. Ayala, K. J. (2007). The 8051 Micro Controller Architecture,
Programming and Applications (3rd. ed.). Thomson Publishers.
2. Hall,D.V. (2005). Micro Processor and Interfacing. Tata McGraw-
Hill.
Reference books:
1. Deshmukh, A. V. (2005).Microcontroller’s theory applications. Tata
McGraw Hill.
2. Bhurchandi, K.M. & Ray, A.K. (2017). Advanced Micro Processors.
Tata McGraw Hill.
119

3. Ayala, K. J. (2005). The 8086 Micro Processors Architecture,

Programming and Applications (3rd. ed.). Thomson Publishers.
4. Carr, J. J. (2003). Elements of Electronic Instrumentation &
Measurements. Pearson Education India.
5. Placko, D.(2007). Fundamentals of Instrumentation and
Measurements. ISTE Ltd.
e-Resources:
1. https://swayam.gov.in/course/4446-microprocessors-and-
microcontrollers
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105102/53
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105102/7
4. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_ee11/preview
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT
KANPUR/microcontrollers/micro/ui/TOC.htm
6. https://nptel.ac.in/downloads/108105102/
7. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100/

ELE 306L Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Develop syntax based programming skills for Microprocessor and
Microcontroller based projects.
• Understand the instructions and register organization of 8086
Microprocessor programming.
• Create arithmetic, logical and functional programming for
Microprocessor
• Perform emulations using and to use and develop 8086 programs.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Write a program to calculate the addition of 16-bit Number.
120

2. Write a program to calculate the addition of 32-bit Number.

3. Write a program totransfer the content of one memory ___location to other
memory ___location.
4. Write a program to exchange the content of one memory ___location to
other memory ___location.
5. Write a program tofind out the maximum of N given numbers.
6. Write a program to generate the Fibonacci Series.
7. Write a program tofind ___location of given numbers.
8. Write a program to find out the multiplication of two 16-bit numbers.
9. Write a program to find out the minimum of N given numbers.
10. Write a program in 8051 to copy a block of 10 bytes from RAM
___location starting at 37h to RAM ___location starting at 59h.
11. Write a program in 8051 for addition of first 10 natural numbers
12. Write a program in 8051 for addition of two 16-bit numbers.
13. Write a program in 8051 using Timer0 to create a 10 kHz square wave
on P1.0

EIE 308 Industrial Instrumentation

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Explain and identify various kinds of sensors and transducers
employed in different types of industrial environments.
• Select and apply a suitable sensor for a given strain and pressure
measurement application.
• Define the principle of working of various sensors used for
temperature, level and flow rate measurement.
• Signify the importance of velocity and vibration measurement in
standard industrial testing procedures.
121

• Understand and analyze a virtual instrument employed for a particular

application.
Section A
Role of transducers in instrumentation- classification of transducer and
its characteristics. Signal Conditioning of Strain Gauge circuits,
temperature compensation for Strain gauge, Piezoelectric Transducers and
its Frequency response. Optical Transducers: Photo emissive cell, Photo
voltaic cell, Photo Conductive cell.
Pressure Measurement: Manometers, Elastic pressure elements,
Electromechanical Pressure Transducers, Vacuum Measurement: Knudsen
gauge, Pirani Gauge, Ionization gauge, McLeod Gauge.
Noise: Electrical noise, Static noise, Magnetic noise, Crosstalk and its
remedies.
Section B
Temperature Measurement: Thermometers: Liquid in glass and
Bimetallic type, Radiation Pyrometers and Optical Pyrometers.
Level Measurement: Sight Glass, Hydrostatic, Purge type level sensor,
differential pressure method for level measurement, Buoyancy methods,
Nucleonic level gauge, Ultrasonic level meter, and capacitive type level
sensor.
Flow measurement:Venturimeter, Orifice plate, Pitot tubes, Rotameter,
Turbine Flowmeter, Electromagnetic Flowmeter, Hot wire anemometer,
Ultrasonic Flowmeter, Laser Doppler anemometer.
Section C
Measurement of Velocity: DC and AC Tacho-generators, Seismic
Transducer for vibration measurement, Accelerometers.
Miscellaneous Measurement: pH Sensor, hygrometer, measurement of
thermal conductivity and thickness, Hydrometer.
Virtual Instrumentation: Architecture of a virtual Instrumentation,
graphical system design, Data-flow techniques, graphical programming in
data flow and comparison with conventional programming.
122

Text Books:
1. Sawhney, A. K. (2015). A Course in Electrical and Electronic
Measurements and Instrumentation. Dhanpat Rai Publication.
2. Jain, R.K. (2015). Mechanical and Industrial Measurements. Khanna
Publishers.
3. Nakra, B.C. & Chaudhry, K.K. (2016). Instrumentation, Measurement
and Analysis (4th ed.). Tata McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
1. Doebelin, E. O. (1990). Measurement Systems: Application and Design
(4th ed.). Mcgraw Hill International.
2. Eckmann, D. P. (2006). Industrial Instrumentation. CBS Publishers
and Distributors.
3. Kalsi, H.S. (2017). Electronic Instrumentation (3rd ed.). Mcgraw Hill
Education.
4. Singh, S.K. (2017). Industrial Instrumentation and Control (3rd ed.).
Mcgraw Hill Education.
5. Rangan, C., Sharma, G. & Mani, V.S.V. (2017). Instrumentation:
Devices and systems (3rd ed.). Mcgraw Hill Education.
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/3
2. https://swayam.gov.in/course/3764-industrial-instrumentation
3. https://online.stanford.edu/courses/me220-introduction-sensors

EIE 308L Industrial Instrumentation Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Employ built-in functions in LabVIEW to solve various numerical
problems.
123

• Develop Vis for solving problems involving different types of

mathematical models and equations.
• Solve many simulation problems encountered in theory courses of the
semester.
• Perform simulations using LabVIEW and develop optimization toolkits
for various electrical and electronics engineering problems.
• Design and simulate projects for electrical and electronics engineering
problems.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Introduction to LabVIEW environment.
2. Application of arithmetic, logical and Boolean operations in LabVIEW.
3. Implement a virtual instrument (VI) for conversion of temperature from
Celsius to Fahrenheit.
4. Develop a VI in LabVIEW to solve an equation using Formula Node.
5. Create a VI to compute full adder logic using half adder logic as sub VI.
6. Application of ‘For' and ‘While’ loop using LabVIEW.
7. Create a VI to find the factorial of the given number using ‘For’ Loop
and Shift Registers.
8. Create a VI to display any information using case structure.
9. Introduction of array and cluster.
10. Introduction to NI ELVIS and its application to component testing.
11. Implementation of clipper and potential divider circuit using ELVIS.
12. Implement a RC circuit on NI ELVIS and acquire the data for charging
and discharging period.
13. Implement an event counter using photo interrupter (1A57HR) on NI
ELVIS and also implement a VI to display the counting.
14. Interface LDR using NI ELVIS and implement a VI to glow an LED
when LDR senses the change in light intensity.
124

EIE 309 Linear Control System

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Design and implement feedback control scheme for any industrial
process.
• Identify and utilize the various components employed in control
systems.
• Design and apply the control scheme for controlling any plant under
consideration.
• Utilize various types of frequency ___domain approaches in the
development of a control scheme for complex dynamic process.
• Apply the compensation techniques and modern control approaches in
design and analysis of control systems.
Section A
Introduction to control system, differential equation and LTI transfer
function, Mathematical Modeling, Block diagram reduction techniques,
signal flow graph, servomechanism: synchros, AC and DC servomotors.
Time Domain Analysis: Standard test signals, Time Response Analysis of
First Order and Second Order System. Transient response analysis, steady
state errors and error constants.
Section B
Introduction to controllers: P, PI, PD and PID controllers, effect of
feedback, Stability concept, relative stability, Routh stability criterion.
Root Loci Technique: Concept of root locus, construction of root locus and
closed loop stability.
Frequency Domain Analysis: Correlation between time & frequency
response, Polar plots, Stability in frequency ___domain (GM & PM), Nyquist
plots and Nyquist stability criterion, Constant M and N circles.
125

Section C
Bode plot, Performance specifications in frequency-___domain. Compensation:
cascade and feedback compensation, time & frequency ___domain design
using lag, lead and lag-lead compensation,
State Space Analysis:
Concepts of state, state variable, state model, state models for linear
continuous time functions, diagonalization of transfer function, solution of
state equations, concept of controllability & observability.
Text Books:
1. Ogata, K. (1996). Modern Control Engineering. USA, Upper Saddle
River, NJ: Prentice-Hall
2. Kuo, B.C. &Golnaraghi, F. (2003). Automatic controlsystem(8th ed.).
Asia: John Wiley and Sons.
3. Gopal, M. (2002). Control System: Principles and Design (3rd ed.).
TMH.
e-Resources:
1. https://swayam.gov.in/courses/4776-july-2018-control-systems
2. https://www.udemy.com/control-systems/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101037/
4. https://studentshubblog.files.wordpress.com/2014/12/modern-control-
engineering-3rd-ed-ogataprentice-hall.pdf
5. https://pdfstores.files.wordpress.com/2017/01/kuo-
automaticcontrolsystems.pdf
6. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ee41
7. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106098/
8. https://nptel.ac.in/downloads/108103008/
9. http://www.mediafire.com/file/aqkq47e1el3hri7/Control+System+Engi
neering-+Norman+S.+Nise.+6th+Edition.pdf
10. https://drive.google.com/file/d/0B2KoaKB1FMGjUHNXdlZvSFhUM
mM/edit
126

EIE 309L Linear Control System Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Able to use and design the control schemes for various industrial
processes.
• Capable to identify and employ various filters and compensators
utilized in control system design.
• Apply many built-in functions in MATLAB to solve numerical
problems
• Develop code for solving problems involving different types of
mathematical models and equations.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Operation and error calculation of the transmitter-receiver pair as a
simple open loop position control system.
2. To obtain open and closed loop response of various process
configurations.
3. To attain open loop and closed loop speed control of DC motor.
4. Step response studies for various values of forward gain during
position control of DC motor.
5. To perform time ___domain analysis of first and second order systems
using linear system simulator.
6. To study potentiometer as an error detector.
7. Identification of the oven parameters and study of P, PI, and PID based
temperature control of oven.
8. To study high pass, low pass, band pass & band stop filter.
9. To study lead lag compensator.
MATLAB based experiments:
10. To obtain transfer function of a system defined in pole-zero form.
11. To find overall transfer function of a system comprise of series and
parallel combinations of plants.
127

12. To find closed loop transfer function from the given block diagram and
draw its pole-zero plot.
13. To plot step and impulse response of first and second order control
system.
14. To obtain root locus, Nyquist plot and bode plot for the given transfer
function.

MCTR 305 Robotics and Control

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Develop skills of creating industrial and mobile robot projects
• Implement robots like KUKA, PUMA in real industrial world
• Create innovative robot designs using mathematical concepts of
kinematics
• Develop autonomous mobile robots in surveillance, security, home and
office services.
Section A
Introduction to Robotics: Definition and Evolution of Robots, Laws of
Robotics, Anatomy and Classification of Robots, Human Arm verses
Robotic Arm, its Manipulation and Control.
Coordinate Frames: Translated and Rotated Frames, Mapping between
Translated and Rotated Frames, Transformation of Vectors, Composite
Homogeneous Transformation Matrix, Fixed Angle(RPY) and Euler Angle
(WVU, ZYZ) Representation.
Robot Kinematics: Kinematic Modeling of the Manipulator, Denavit-
Hartenberg (D-H) Notation, Forward (Direct) Kinematics and Inverse
Kinematics Model, Kinematics of typical manipulators (2-DOF, Cylindrical
arm, Articulated arm, SCARA, Stanford,PUMA-560), Solutions of inverse
Kinematic problems.
128

Section B
Differential Transformation: Linear and angular velocity, relationship
between transformation matrix and angular velocity, velocity propagation,
Jacobian Manipulator, Jacobian Inverse and singularity, Static analysis
(force and momentum equilibrium),
Dynamic Modeling: Lagrange-Euler formulation, computation of Inertia
(KE, PE and EOM) and Newton-Euler formulation of 2-DOF planar
manipulator.
Section C
Trajectory Planning: Terminology, Steps in Trajectory Planning, Joint
Space Techniques, Cartesian Space Techniques, Joint-Space Versus
Cartesian Space Trajectory Planning.
Control of Manipulators: Open-and closed-loop control, manipulator
control problem, linear control schemes, characteristics of second-order
linear system, linear second-order SISO model of manipulator joint, joint
actuators, partitioned PD control scheme PID control scheme, computer
torque control.
Text books:
1. Groover, M. P. (2017). Industrial Robotics: Technology,
Programming, and Applications(2nd ed.). Pearson Education.
2. Niku, S. B. (2011). Introduction to Robotics (2nd ed.). Wiley.
3. Fu, K.S., Lee, C.S. G. &Gonzalez, R. (1987) . Robotics: Control,
Sensing, vision and intelligence. Tata McGraw-Hill Education
4. Mittal, R. K. & Nagrath, I. J.(2018). Robotics and Control. Tata
McGraw-Hill Education.
References books:
1. Craig, J. J. (2008). Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control
(3rd ed.). Pearson Education.
2. Spong, M. W. & Vidyasagar, M. (2008). Robot Dynamics and Control.
John Wiley & Sons.
3. Siciliano , B. & Sciavicco, L. (2010). Robotics: Modelling, Planning
and Control. Springer.
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112101099/
129

2. https://www.edx.org/course/robotics-1
3. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/robotics
4. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-12-introduction-
to-robotics-fall-2005/
5. https://www.edx.org/course/robotics-dynamics-control-pennx-robo3x
6. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_me61/preview
7. https://swayam.gov.in/courses/4859-july-2018-robotics
8. https://www.edx.org/learn/robotics
9. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/robotics

MCTR 305L Robotics and Control Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Develop skills of creating industrial and mobile robot projects
• Implement robots like KUKA, PUMA in real industrial world
• Create innovative robot designs using mathematical concepts of
kinematics
• Develop autonomous mobile robots in surveillance, security, home and
office services.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Implementation of D-H Parameters on Robo Analyzer software.
2. Implementation of Forward Kinematics on Robo Analyzer Software.
3. Implementation of Inverse Kinematics on Robo Analyzer Software.
4. Implementation and study of KUKA-Sim simulator/HMI Interface.
5. Implementation on Hardware (KR-16).
6. Implementation of Sensor Fusion on Robotino Software and hardware.
7. Implementation of Path Tracking on Robotino Software and hardware.
8. Study of TAL BRABO Robot with practical implementation.
130

EEE 308 Power Electronics

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Analyze functioning of switching devices for various applications
• Operate the switches in series and parallel, protect the switches and
apply commutation techniques for different circuits
• Analyze and design phase controlled rectifiers and their performance
• Implement of voltage regulators and cyclo-converters
• Design of inverter circuits
Section A
Need of power electronics, introduction to power electronics devices (static
and dynamic characteristics) power diodes, power transistor, power
MOSFETS, IGBT, MCT, GTOs and TRIAC. Thyristor (SCR):
Operational characteristics turn on methods, switching characteristics,
protection, over voltage protection, over current protection, gate protection,
Snubber circuit firing circuits, heating, series and parallel combination of
Thyristors.
Section B
Commutation Techniques: Load commutation, resonant- pulse
commutation complementary commutation, impulse commutation, line
commutation, Phase controlled rectifier: Principle of phase control, single
and three phase converters, effect of source impedance on the performance
of converters dual converter (ideal and practical) DC choppers: Principle,
control strategies, step-up and step-down choppers.
Section C
Inverters: Single-phase voltage source inverters 180 and 120 mode
operation, Fourier analysis of single-phase inverter output voltage, pulse
width modulated inverters, reduction of harmonics in the inverter output,
single phase current source inverters with ideal switch. Cyclo-converters:
Step-up and step-down cyclo-converter, Single phase to single-phase cyclo-
converters three-phase half wave cyclo-converters.
131

Text Books
1. Rashid, M. H. (2017). Power Electronics Circuits Devices and
Applications (4th ed.). PHI Publication
2. Bimbhra,P.S. (2012). Power Electronics (5th ed.).Khanna Publication.
3. Singh,M. D. &Khanchandani,K. B (2013). Power Electronics (2nd ed.).
McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
1. Moorthy, R. (1991). An Introduction To Thyristors And Their
Application (2nded.).Affiliated East-West Press.
2. Sen,P.C. (2005). Modern Power Electronics (2nd ed.). S.Chand
Publisher.
E-Resources:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_ee03/preview
2. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/power-electronics
3. https://swayam.gov.in/courses/5440-jan-2019-fundamental-of-power-
electronics
4. https://swayam.gov.in/courses/5435-jan-2019-advance-power-
electronics-and-control
5. http://minitorn.tlu.ee/~jaagup/kool/java/kursused/15/robootika/elektrio
pik.pdf
6. http://down.elechu.com/Power%20Electronics/PEmohan(2nd).pdf
7. http://down.elechu.com/Power%20Electronics/PE3rdmohan.pdf
8. http://u.dianyuan.com/bbs/u/51/1173964035.pdf
9. http://dl.offdownload.ir/ali/Power%20Electronics,Daniel%20W.%20H
art.pdf
10. https://edisciplinas.usp.br/pluginfile.php/2587319/mod_resource/conte
nt/2/Introduction_to_Solid_State_Power_Electronics_Powerex.pdf
11. https://onedrive.live.com/?cid=7BCEF2CD3680B4A0&id=7BCEF2C
D3680B4A0%21212&parId=7BCEF2CD3680B4A0%21124&o=One
Up
12. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105017/
132

EEE 304L Power Electronics Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Analyze functioning of switching devices
• Implement triggering circuit
• Apply appropriate commutation technique
• Analyze and design phase controlled rectifiers and their performance
• Design of cyclo-converters
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. To draw the V-I characteristics of DIAC.
2. To draw the V-I characteristics of SCR.
3. To draw the V-I characteristics of TRIAC.
4. To draw the input and output characteristics of IGBT.
5. To draw the firing angle and output voltage of SCR triggering circuit.
6. To obtain the time delay of UJT controlled thyristor firing circuit.
7. To implement the communication technique of SCR.
8. To draw the output voltage and current of inverter using MOSFET.
9. To obtain the ripple factor of single phase half and full wave rectifier.
10. To obtain the output frequency of cyclo-converter using R and RL
load.

EIE 307 Industrial Automation

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Identify and employ the various components of Industrial automation
to provide automated solution of given problem.
133

• Implement and deploy Programmable Logic Controller programs for

industrial application.
• Design Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition based monitoring
and control application for industrial system.
• Operate and understand the distributed control system utilized in
process industries.
• Understand and analyze the various data communication links and
protocols.
Section A
Introduction to Automation and its Components: Relays- electro
mechanical relays, reed relays, hermetically sealed relay, solid state relay.
Contactors, Switches- toggle switch, DIP switch, Rotary switch, Selector
switch, Pushbutton, Limit Switch, Temperature switch, Pressure switch,
Level switch, Flow switch, Actuators.
Section B
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) : Introduction, Architecture,
Selection criteria, I/O modules, Introduction to various programming
techniques, Ladder diagram programming, Bit Instructions, Timers,
Counters, Sequencers, mathematical and logical instructions, types of
memory, real time applications.
Section C
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA): Introduction,
Elements of SCADA, Features of SCADA, Applications of SCADA
system.
Distributed Control System (DCS): Centralized and Distributed Control
Concept, Specifications of DCS, System Architecture, Elements of DCS,
DCS Displays (User defined displays, Graphic Display, Trend Display,
Alarm summary, Instrument faceplate, tuning display).Advantages and
Applications of DCS.
Data Communication Links and Protocols: HART Protocol, Field Bus,
Comparison of MODBUS, PROFIBUS, FIPBUS, Industrial Ethernet.
Text Books:
1. Killian, C.T. (2006). Modern Control Technology, Components and
Systems (2nd ed.). Cengage Learning.
134

2. Lukcas,M.P. (1986). Distributed Control Systems. New York: Van

Nostrand Reinhold Co.
3. Webb, J.W. &Reis,R. A. (2003). Programmable Logic Controller-
Principles and Applications (4th ed.), New Jersey:PHI.
Reference Books:
1. Petruzella,F. D. (2010).Programmable logic controller (4th ed.). New
York: McGraw Hill.
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105062/18
2. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/aeronautics-and-astronautics/16-06-
principles-of-automatic-control-fall-2012/
3. https://www.coursera.org/lecture/intelligent-machining/programmable-
logic-controllers-plc-fGz3r
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112102011/11
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/3
6. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105062/37
7. https://swayam.gov.in/course/1395-industrial-automation-and-control

EIE 307L Industrial Automation Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Programming of Siemens Programmable Logic Controllers and other
Programmable Logic Controllers with similar specifications.
• Design and deploy Programmable Logic Controller programs using
timers and counters.
• Design applications based on logic and arithmetic operations using
Programmable Logic Controllers.
• Implement the various real life applications using Programmable Logic
Controllers.
135

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Programmable Logic Controller: Siemens S7-1200 & Mode of
Programming: Ladder Logic
1. Introduction to S7-1200 and its configuration procedure.
2. Implementation of basic logic gates.
3. PLC based Ladder logic programming using NO/NC Switches.
4. Applications of soft timers in controlling of industrial operations.
5. Applications of counters for real-time event counting.
6. Write a program for blinking of LEDs.
7. Introduction to arithmetic operations in industrial applications.
8. Implementation to logical operations in industrial applications.
9. Write a ladder logic program for control of traffic light.
10. Designing of a digital clock using ladder logic programming.

EEE 309 Power System-I

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Understand generation of electric power and calculate transmission line
parameters
• Analyze the performance of short, medium and long transmission lines
• Identify pin, post and suspension insulators
• Estimation of string efficiency and mechanical design of overhead
transmission lines
• Understand corona effect, electromagnetic interference with
communication lines and travelling waves
• Implementation of insulated cables, distribution system, and voltage
and frequency control methods.
136

Section A
Introduction to power system. Generation of electrical energy- thermal,
hydro and nuclear power plants. Load curves and factors, Electricity tariffs.
Transmission: types of conductor, resistance of line, skin effect, Proximity
effect, Calculation of inductance and capacitance of single phase, three
phase, single circuit and double circuit transmission lines, Representation
and performance of short, medium and long transmission lines, Ferranti
effect. Surge impedance loading.
Types of insulators, Voltage distribution across an insulator string, string
efficiency, grading and methods of improving string efficiency.
Section B
Mechanical Design of Overhead Transmission Lines- Catenary Curve,
Calculation of Sag and Tension, Effects of wind and ice loading, sag
template, Vibration dampers.
Corona and Interference- Phenomena of Corona, Corona formulation,
Calculation of Potential Gradient, Corona loss, Factors affecting Corona,
Methods of reducing Corona and Interference, Electrostatic and
Electromagnetic Interference with Communication lines.
Traveling Waves- Wave equation for uniform Transmission lines, velocity
of propagation, surge impedance, reflection and transmission of traveling
waves under different line loadings. Bewlay’s lattice diagram, protection of
equipments and line against traveling waves.
Section C
Insulated cables: Type of cables and their construction, dielectric stress,
grading of cables, insulation resistance, capacitance of single phase and
three phase cables, dielectric loss, heating of Cables.
Distribution Systems: Primary and secondary distribution systems, feeder,
distributor and service mains. Radial and ring- main distribution systems,
Kelvin’s law.
Voltage and Load Frequency Control: Introduction to control of active
and reactive power flow, control of voltage, Introduction to Load
Frequency Control and Automatic generation control.
Text Books:
1. Stevenson, W. D. (2002), “Element of Power System
Analysis”(2ndEdn.) McGraw Hill, USA.
137

2. Wadhwa, C. L. (2016), “Electrical Power Systems”(7thEdn.) New age

international Ltd. Third Edition.
3. Deshpande, M. V. (2011), “Electrical Power System Design” (1stEdn.),
PHI.
Reference Books:
1. Soni, Gupta & Bhatnagar (2009), “A Course in Electrical
Power”, (1stEdn.) Dhanpat Rai & Sons, India
2. Uppal, S. L (1987), “Electric Power”, (15thEdn.) Khanna Publishers,
India
3. Singh, S. N., (2011) “Electric Power Generation, Transmission &
distribution” (2ndEdn. ), PHI
e-Resources:
1. https://drive.google.com/file/d/0B15qSPkgb-
zRY216X1NPa1dlWUU/view
2. http://jfgieras.com/Grigsby_Chapter_34_LEM.pdf
3. http://down.elechu.com/stability/Book.pdf
4. https://nemasumit.files.wordpress.com/2017/08/electrical-power-
engineers-handbook.pdf
5. https://nemasumit.files.wordpress.com/2017/08/electrical-machines-
drives-and-power-systems-5e.pdf
6. https://docs.google.com/file/d/0B5vXY4-
Kg5GeN19FVjNvVXZlTjg/edit
7. https://pdfstores.files.wordpress.com/2016/04/modern-power-system-
analysis_d-p-kothari-and-i-j-nagrath.pdf
8. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105017/

EEE 309L Power System-I Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Perform various arithmetic and matrix operations in MATLAB
138

• Implement MATLAB commands, control operators

• Calculation of various problems using MATLAB programming
• Design electrical circuits using MATLAB simulink
• Estimate power system parameters using MATLAB programming
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Acquaintance with MATLAB.
2. Various matrix operations, logical operations and loop statements using
MATLAB.
3. Study of various plot commands in MATLAB.
4. Transient analysis of series RL and RC circuit.
5. Generation of basic signals (Impulse, Step, Ramp etc.) using Simulink
6. Calculate the inductance and capacitance of different type of
transmission line configuration
7. Calculation of Vs, Vr, line losses and power factor of short
transmission line.
8. Calculation of Vs, Vr, line losses and power factor of medium
transmission line.

EEE 307 Electrical Machines-II

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Develop various types of models used for synchronous machines like,
hydro, steam turbine, governors & excitation systems
• Understand the construction, connections, principle of operation of
three-phase & single phase induction motor
• Understand equivalent circuits representation of three phase & single
phase induction motor
139

• Understand calculation of the performance characteristics

(current/speed and torque/speed) of the three-phase & single phase
induction motor
• Understand the starting and speed control methods of three-phase
induction motor
• Understand the construction, connections, principle of operation of
single-phase induction and special purpose motors
• Perform tests on synchronous and induction machines
Section-A
Synchronous Machine I: Constructional features, Armature winding, EMF
Equation, Winding coefficients, equivalent circuit and phasor diagram,
Armature reaction, O. C. & S. C. tests, Voltage Regulation using
Synchronous Impedance Method, MMF Method, Potier’s Triangle Method,
Parallel Operation of synchronous generators, operation on infinite bus,
synchronizing power and torque co-efficient Synchronous Machine II:
Two Reaction Theory, Power flow equations of cylindrical and salient pole
machines, operating characteristics Synchronous Motor: Starting methods,
Effect of varying field current at different loads, V- Curves, Hunting &
damping, synchronous condenser
Section-B
Three phase Induction Machine – I: Constructional features, Rotating
magnetic field, Principle of operation, Phasor diagram, equivalent circuit,
torque and power equations, Torque- slip characteristics, no load & blocked
rotor tests, efficiency, Induction generator & its applications.Three phase
Induction Machine- II: Starting, Deep bar and double cage rotors,
Cogging& Crawling, Speed Control (with and without emf injection in
rotor circuit.)
Section-C
Single phase Induction Motor: Double revolving field theory, Equivalent
circuit, No load and blocked rotor tests, Starting methods, repulsion motor
AC Commutator Motors: Universal motor, Single phase AC series
compensated motor, stepper motors
Text Books:
1. Nagrath, I. J. &Kothari, D. P. (2017), “Electrical Machines” (3rdEdn.),
Tata McGraw Hill.
140

2. Ashfaq , H. (2016), “Electrical Machines” (5thEdn.), Dhanpat Rai &

Sons.
3. Fitggerald, A. E., Kingsley Jr., C. and Umans (2009), “Electric
Machinery” (6thEdn), McGraw Hill, International Student Edition.
4. Gupta, B. R. &Singhal, V. (2005) “Fundamentals of Electrical
Machines” (3rdEdn.), New Age International.
Reference Books:
1. Kosow, I. L. (2009), “Electric Machine and Transformers” (2ndEdn.),
Prentice Hall of India.
2. Say, M. G. (2005), “The Performance and Design of AC machines”
(4thEdn.), Pit man & Sons.
3. Guru, B. S. and Hizirogulu, H. R. (2001) “Electric Machinery and
Transformers” (3rdEdn.), Oxford University Press.
E-Resources:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_ee01
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106071/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105017/
4. https://eleccompengineering.files.wordpress.com/2014/08/stephen_cha
pman_electric_machinery_fundamentalsbookfi-org-1.pdf
5. http://solidviews.com/OaOY
6. https://kahrbjy.files.wordpress.com/2012/08/principles-of-electric-
machines-solution-manual.pdf

EEE 301L Electrical Machines-II Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Understand calculation of the performance characteristics
(current/speed and torque/speed) of the three-phase & single phase
induction motor
141

• Understand the starting and speed control methods of DC motor

• Understand the construction, connections, principle of operation of
transformer
• Perform tests on DC and induction machines
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Perform no load test in a single phase induction motor.
2. Obtain the losses and efficiency of DC shunt machine by Hopkinson’s
test.
3. Obtain the efficiency and losses of DC machine by Swinburne’s test.
4. Perform load test of single phase IM.
5. To perform Sumpner’s test of single phase transformer.
6. Study of cut section model of single and three phase Induction motor.
7. Speed control of compound DC motor.
8. To study compound motor-generator set.

EEE 310 Power System-II

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Model various power system components (synchronous machine,
transformer, transmission line) and representation of 3 phase system
using per unit system & symmetrical components
• Calculate and analyze the symmetrical and unsymmetrical faults in
power system
• Solve load flow/power flow problems on transmission line with various
analysis methods and interpret the result
• Analyse transient and steady state stability for power system
• Determine the economic schedule of thermal generators
142

Section A
Representation of Power System Components: Synchronous machines,
Transformers, Transmission lines, One line diagram, Impedance and
reactance diagram, per unit System.
Symmetrical components and fault analysis: Symmetrical Components
of unbalanced phasors, power in terms of symmetrical components,
sequence impedances and sequence networks. Transient in R-L series
circuit, calculation of 3-phase short circuit current and reactance of
synchronous machine, internal voltage of loaded machines under transient
conditions.
Section B
Unsymmetrical faults: Analysis of single line to ground fault, line to line
fault and Double Line to ground fault on an unloaded generators and power
system network with and without fault impedance. Formation of Z bus
using singular transformation and algorithm, computer method for short
circuit calculations.
Load Flows: Introduction, bus classifications, nodal admittance matrix (Y
BUS), development of load flow equations, load flow solution using Gauss
Siedel and Newton-Raphson method, approximation to N-R method, line
flow equations and fast decoupled method.
Section C
Power System Stability: Stability and Stability limit, Steady state stability
study, derivation of Swing equation, transient stability studies by equal area
criterion and step-by-step method. Factors affecting steady state and
transient stability and methods of improvement.
Economic Operation of Power Systems: Introduction, Input output, heat
rate and incremental rate curves of thermal generating units, Distribution of
loads between units within a plant, Transmission loss equation, Classical
Economic dispatch with losses.
Text Books:
1. Stevenson, W. D. (2002). Element of Power System
Analysis(2ndEdn.).McGraw Hill, USA.
2. Wadhwa, C. L. (2016). Electrical Power Systems(7thEdn.) New age
international Ltd. Third Edition.
143

3. Deshpande, M. V. (2011). Electrical Power System Design (1stEdn.).

PHI.
Reference Books:
1. Soni, Gupta & Bhatnagar (2009). A Course in Electrical
Power (1stEdn.).Dhanpat Rai & Sons, India
2. Uppal, S. L (1987). Electric Power(15thEdn.).Khanna Publishers, India
3. Singh, S. N., (2011) “Electric Power Generation, Transmission &
distribution” (2ndEdn.), PHI
E-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105067/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102047/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105104/
4. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_ee02
5. https://drive.google.com/file/d/0B15qSPkgb-
zRY216X1NPa1dlWUU/view
6. http://jfgieras.com/Grigsby_Chapter_34_LEM.pdf
7. http://down.elechu.com/stability/Book.pdf
8. https://nemasumit.files.wordpress.com/2017/08/electrical-machines-
drives-and-power-systems-5e.pdf
9. https://pdfstores.files.wordpress.com/2016/04/modern-power-system-
analysis_d-p-kothari-and-i-j-nagrath.pdf

EEE 310L Power System-II Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

• Calculate and analyze the symmetrical and unsymmetrical faultsin

power system
• Solve load flow/power flow problems on transmission line with various
analysis methods and interpret the result
• Analyse transient and steady state stability for power system
• Determine the economic schedule of thermal generators
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. To plot the instantaneous current, active and reactive power for a given
load with power factor over the interval 0 to 2π.
2. To formulate bus admittance (Y-BUS) matrix using node equation
method.
3. To formulate bus admittance (Y-BUS) matrix using singular
transformation.
4. To solve non-linear equation using Gauss-Seidel and Newton Raphson
method.
5. To solve load flow problem using Gauss-Seidel.
6. To solve load flow problem Newton Raphson method.
7. To obtain short-circuit parameters for symmetrical faults.
8. To perform unsymmetrical fault analysis
9. To perform transient stability analysis of single machine connected to
infinite bus system.
10. To obtain numerical solution of Swing equation using step-by-step
method.
11. Software will used: MATLAB, PSS®E, PSCAD, Dig SILENT Power
Factory and GAMS.

MCTR 304 Hydraulics Engineering

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To understand the basic principles of Fluid Mechanics.
145

• To interpret about Continuity equation, Euler's equation, Bernoulli’s

theorem.
• To differentiate types of valves.
• To describe the different type’s compressors, pumps, actuators and
their applications.
• To understand the working of hydraulic motor.
• To know about hydraulic oils and they can design the hydraulic
circuits.
Section A
Introduction to Hydraulics, Fluid classifications, Properties of fluid, Shear
stresses in a fluid. Pressures & Measurement of Pressure: Absolute, Gauge
&Vacuum Pressure, Pascal’s law, Hydrostatic law.
Hydrostatic Static Forces on Submerged Bodies: Flat surface & Curved
Surface.
Buoyancy and Floatation: Archimedes’s Principle, Metacenter.
Fluid Kinematics: Types of Fluid Flow, Flow rate & Continuity Equation.
Fluid Dynamics: Euler’s Equation, Bernoulli’s theorem.
Application of Bernoulli’s theorem: Venturimeter, Orifice Meter, Pitot tube,
Notches & Weirs, Flow in Pipes & Losses: Major losses & Minor losses.
Section B
Valves: Directional control valves, Pressure control valves, Proportional
control valves, Flow control valves. Hydraulic Cylinders: Single acting,
Double Acting. Special Cylinders: Special, Rod less, Telescopic. Fluid
power Actuators: Linear & Rotary Actuators. Hydraulic Pumps: Centrifugal
Pump, Reciprocating Pump, Rotary Displacement Pump. Compressors:
Piston, Screw, Reciprocating, Rotary and Axial. ISO symbols and its
Applications. Hydraulic System-Hydraulic Press, Hydraulic lift, Hydraulic
Accumulator.
Section C
Hydraulic Oils: Types, Properties and applications. Classification: Mineral
based Fire resistant & Biodegradable Oils. Filters, Contaminations and
Location of Filter.
146

Hydraulic Motors: Gear Motors, LSHT Motors, Multi stroke axial piston
motors, Multi stroke radial piston motors, Variable Displacement Radial
piston motors.
Design of hydraulic circuits: Basic and Industrial hydraulic circuits,
Advantages, Application and Design of Electro-hydraulic system, Electro
hydraulic Control.
Text Books:-
1. Cimbala John &Cengel A Yungus. Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals
and Applications (3rd ed.). McGraw-Hill Education.
2. Majumdar, S R.(2011). Oil Hydraulic Systems: Principles and
Maintenance. McGraw-Hill Education.
3. Bansal, R K. (2018). A Textbook of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic
Machines (10th ed.). Laxmi Publications.
4. Parr Andrew. (1993). Hydraulics & Pneumatics. Jaico Publishing
House.
Reference Books:-
1. Frank White. (2015). Fluid Mechanics. McGraw-Hill Education.
2. Som,S K, BiswasGautam&Chakraborty,S. (2017). Introduction to
Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines (3rd ed.) McGraw Hill Education.
3. Anthony Esposito. (2008). Fluid Power with Applications. Pearson,
4. Jagadeesha T. &ThammaiahGowda. (2013). Fluid Power: Generation,
Transmission and Control. Wiley.
E-Resources:-
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105046/
2. https://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/
3. https://www.coursera.org/lecture/fluid-power/hydraulics-and-
pneumatics-SD8dv
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112106175/
147

MCTR 304L Hydraulics Engineering Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Recognize standard schematic symbols for common fluid power
components.
• Design the hydraulic circuit using direction control valve, non return
valve, throttle non return valve & controlling by pressure relief valve.
• Understand the basics behind the pressure intensification.
• Understand basic fluid power and troubleshoot electro-hydraulic
circuits using schematic diagrams.
• Understand the operation, application, and maintenance of common
fluid power components such as pumps, compressors, valves,
cylinders, motors, accumulators, pipe, hose, and fittings.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. To study hydraulics system & pump.
2. To study hydraulic differential cylinder & hydraulic motor.
3. Actuation of double acting cylinder & pressure intensification using
4/2 & 4/3 direction control valve.
4. Actuation of double acting cylinder using pilot operated non return
valve.
5. Actuation of double acting cylinder using throttle non return valve.
6. Actuation of double acting cylinder & controlling by pressure relief
valve.
7. Design of hydraulic circuit using Hydraulic accumulator.
8. Actuation of double acting cylinder using 4/2 & 4/3 solenoid operated
direction control valve.
9. Actuation of double acting cylinder using non return valve with
solenoid operated valve.
10. Actuation of double acting cylinder using adjustable throttle valve with
4/2 & 4/3 solenoid operated direction control valve.
148

11. Actuation of double acting cylinder using flow control valve with 4/2
& 4/3 solenoid operated direction control valve.
12. Actuation of double acting cylinder using pressure reducing valve with
4/2 & 4/3 solenoid operated direction control valve.

ELE 310 Analog Electronics

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Explain the operation and properties of Op-amp.
• Explain the design of differential amplifiers, active filters, oscillators,
and other linear and non-linear circuits using linear integrated circuits.
• Design and analysis of single stage, multistage amplifiers and high
frequency amplifiers.
Section- A
Operational Amplifier and its applications: BJT differential amplifier: DC
and AC analysis, Transfer characteristics, Differential and Common mode
gain, Ideal Op-amp, inverting and non-inverting amplifier, offset voltage,
offset current, bias current, frequency response, slew rate, CMRR, summing
amplifier, differential and instrumentation amplifier, design of integrator
and differentiator, logarithmic and anti-logarithmic amplifiers, Active
filters.
Section- B
Op-amp RC oscillator circuits: Wien bridge, Phase shift; square wave &
triangular wave generator, voltage controlled oscillator, Phase locked loops:
performance factors, Integrated circuit PLL (565) and its applications,
Precision rectifier, comparator, Schmitt trigger and 555 IC Timer, Voltage
Regulators: Voltage regulator basics, OP-AMP series voltage regulators,
adjustable voltage regulators, ,short circuit protection and fold back current
limiting circuits, IC voltage regulators , switching regulators.
149

Section- C
High frequency amplifiers, Hybrid –pi CE transistor model, Hybrid –pi
conductance, Hybrid –pi capacitances, CE short circuit current gain,
Current gain with resistive load, Single stage CE transistor amplifier
response, Gain bandwidth product.
Multistage Amplifier: Frequency response, Effect of cascading on
bandwidth, RC coupled amplifier; Low frequency response of an RC
coupled stage, Effect of emitter bypass capacitor.
Recommended Books:
1. Gayakwad, Ramakant A. (2010). OP-AMP & Linear Integrated
Circuits. New Delhi: Prentice Hall Publication.
2. Bell, David A. (2011) Operational Amplifiers and Linear ICs. New
Delhi: Oxford University Press.
3. Parikh, Millman&Halkias. (2010) Integrated Electronics: Analog &
Digital Circuits and Systems. New Delhi: McGraw Hill Education.
4. Sedra, Adel., & Smith, Kenneth. (2009).Microelectronic Circuits
Theory and Applications. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.
Suggested E-Resources:
1. Analog Electronic Circuits by Prof. S. C. Dutta Roy, Indian Institute of
Technology Delhi. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102095/

ELE 310L Analog Electronics Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes: After completion of this laboratory course, students

will be able to:
• Design, construct, and analyze the various analog circuits to compare
experimental results in the laboratory with theoretical analysis.
• Observe the amplitude and frequency responses of common
amplification circuits
• Construct the desired Electronic design to meet specific requirements.
150

List of Experiments:
1. To design the Astable Multivibrator using 555
2. To design the Monostable Multivibrator using 555
3. To design summer using 741 IC
4. To design Intergrator using 741 IC
5. To design Schmitt Trigger using 741/555 IC
6. To design Differentiator using 741 IC
7. To design peak detector using 741 IC
8. To design scalar using 741 IC
9. To study active filters: LPF, HPF, BPF.
10. To design Voltage to frequency converter.
11. To study phase locked loop.
12. To study frequency shift keying using PLL 565.

ECE 301 Analog Communication

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Explain different blocks in communication system and how noise
affects communication using different parameters.
• Distinguish between different amplitude modulation schemes with their
advantages, disadvantages and applications and analyse generation and
detection of FM signal and comparison between amplitude and angle
modulation schemes.
• Identify different types of radio receiver circuits.
Section-A
Introduction to signals: Size of signals, Classification of signals, Some
useful signal operations, Unit impulse function, Signals and vectors, Signal
comparison- correlation, Signal representation by orthogonal signal set,
Trigonometric Fourier series, Exponential Fourier series
151

Analysis and Transmission of Signals: Fourier transform of some useful

signals, Some properties of Fourier Transform, Signal Transmission
through linear system, Ideal and practical filters, Signal distortion over a
communication channel, Signal energy and energy spectral density, Signal
power and power spectral density
Section- B
Amplitude Modulation: Baseband and carrier communication, Double
sideband modulation, Single sideband modulation, Quadrature amplitude
modulation, Vestigial sideband modulation, Carrier acquisition,
Superheterodyne receiver
Angle Modulation: Concept of instantaneous frequency, Bandwidth of
angle modulated waves, Generation of FM waves, Demodulation of FM,
Interference in angle modulated systems, FM receiver
Section-C
Random Signal and Noise: Gaussian Noise, Bandpass noise and its
representation, Noise power, SNR ratio, PSD of white noise.
Analog Systems in The Presence of Noise: Baseband system, Double
sideband modulation- Suppressed carrier, Single sideband modulation-
Suppressed carrier, Amplitude modulation, Angle modulated systems-
Phase and Frequency modulation, Optimum preemphasis-deemphasis
systems
Systems and Noise Calculations: Electrical Noise, Noise Figure, Equivalent
Noise Temperature, Cascade Connection of Two-Port Networks, Free-
Space Link Calculations
Recommended Books:
1. Lathi, B.P., Ding, Zhi.,& Gupta, Hari Mohan. (1998). Modern Digital
and Analog Communication Systems. New Delhi: Oxford University
Press
2. Haykin, S. & Moher, M. (2007).Introduction to Analog and Digital
Communication. New York, United States: John Wiley & Sons.
3. Shilling, D.L., &Taub, H. (2008). Principles of Communication
Systems. New Delhi: Mc Graw Hill Publication.
152

Suggested E-Resource:
1. Analog Communication by Prof. Goutam Das, G S Sanyal School of
Telecommunications, Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117105143/

ECE 301L Analog Communication Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes: After completion of this laboratory course, students

will be able to:
• Demonstrate Amplitude modulation and demodulation techniques.
• Demonstrate frequency modulation and demodulation technique.
• Analyze generation and detection of FM signal and comparison
between amplitude and angle modulation schemes.
• Compare different modulations and demodulations to recognize the
advantages and disadvantages of them.
• Identify different radio receiver circuits and role of AGC.
List of Experiments:
1. To Study the Amplitude Modulation and measure modulation Index.
2. To Study the Amplitude Demodulation.
3. To Study the Frequency modulation.
4. To Study the Frequency Demodulation.
5. To Study the Balanced Modulator.
6. To Study the extraction of Single side band from double side
bandwidth phase shifter method.
7. To study the extraction Single side band from double side bandwidth
Weaver’s method.
8. To study the Principle of Ratio Detector.
9. To study the Principle of Foster-Seeley discriminator.
153

EIE 311 Control Systems

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Formulate mathematical model for physical systems and simplify
representation of complex systems using reduction techniques.
• Use standard test signals to identify performance characteristics of first
and second-order systems.
• Apply root locus technique for stability analysis.
• Analyse performance characteristics of system using Frequency
response methods.
Section A
Open loop and closed loop systems, servomechanism, mathematical model
of systems, differential equations and transfer functions, Block diagram
algebra, signal flow graphs; +ve and -ve feedback effects of feedback.
Standard test signals, time response of first and second order systems,
steady state errors and error constants, Design specifications of second
order systems.
Section B
Effects of derivative and integral error compensation, PID controller,
Design considerations for higher order systems in brief, performance
indices.
Concept of stability, necessary conditions for stability, Routh Hurwitz
stability criterion, relative stability criterion, relative stability in terms of
Routh Hurwitz criterion; Root-locus technique.
Correlation between time and frequency response specifications; Frequency
___domain plots, polar plots.
Section C
Bode plot, log magnitude versus phase plots; Gain-margin, Phase-margin,
Nyquist stability criterion; Constant-M and constant-N circles; closed
loop frequency response from these.
154

Preliminary considerations of classical design, cascade and feedback

compensation, time-___domain design using lag, lead and lag lead
compensation, frequency ___domain design using lag.
State Variable model and solution of state equation of LTI systems.
Recommended Books:
1. Nagrath, I. J. (2006). Control systems engineering. New Delhi: New
Age International.
2. Ogata, K., & Yang, Y. (2002). Modern control engineering (Vol. 4).
India: Prentice hall.
Suggested e-resource:
1. Control System by Prof. S. D. Agashe, Indian Institute of Technology,
Bombay. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101037/

EIE 302L Control Systems Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes: After completion of this laboratory course, students

will be able to:
• Understand the concept of time response and frequency response of
any physical system.
• Mathematical modeling of physical system to find out of transfer
system.
• Analyze the stability of system with the help of system response.
List of Experiments:
1. To study and controlling action using PID controller and calculate the
first overshoot temperature and plot the graph.
2. To study the DC position controller and find out the tachometer gain.
3. To determine time ___domain response of a second order systems for step
input and obtain performance parameters.
4. To convert transfer function of a system into state space form and vice-
versa.
155

5. To plot root locus diagram of an open loop transfer function and

determine range of gain ‘k for stability.
6. To plot a Bode diagram of an open loop transfer function.
7. To draw a Nyquist plot of an open loop transfers function and examine
the stability of the system.

ECE 304 Digital Communication

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Analyse and implement the concept of Probability Theory, Random
Variables, Error Control Theory and Information Theory in Digital
Communication Systems
• Explain the concept of Analog to Digital Conversion, Sampling,
Quantization, Pulse Modulation and PCM
• Describe and analyse mathematically the Digital Modulation
Techniques-ASK, FSK, PSK
Section A
Introduction to Digital Communications, Sampling Theorem, Pulse
amplitude modulation, Pulse code modulation: Uniform and Non- uniform
quantization, T1 Carrier System, Differential pulse code modulation, Delta
Modulation
Line Coding: PSD of various line codes: polar signaling, on-off signaling,
bipolar signaling; Pulse shaping: Nyquist criteria for zero ISI, signaling
with controlled ISI, Duobinary pulse, Scrambling, Regenerative repeaters.
Section B
Digital Modulation Techniques: Various techniques of phase shift, BPSK
modulation, spectrum, Bandwidth efficiency, geometrical representation of
BPSK modulation, spectrum, Bandwidth efficiency, geometrical
representation of ASK, FSK& Minimum shift keying
Noise in digital Communication: PCM and Companded PCM SNR,
Matched filter, Calculation of error probability for ASK, ASK, FSK.
156

Section C
Information Theory: The concept of amount of information, Entropy,
Information rate, Huffman coding, Channel capacity of a discrete
memoriless channel, Shannon's Theorem, Channel capacity, capacity of a
Gaussian channel, Bandwidth-S/N trade – off.
Error control coding: Rationale of coding and types of codes, Discrete
memory less charnel, some Algebraic concepts -Code efficiency and
Hamming bound, linear block codes, Cyclic codes, Convolution codes,
maximum likelihood decoding of convolution codes.
Recommended Books:
1. Lathi, B.P., Ding, Zhi.,& Gupta, Hari Mohan. (1998). Modern Digital
and Analog Communication Systems. New Delhi: Oxford University
Press
2. Haykin, S. & Moher, M. (2007) Introduction to Analog and Digital
Communication. New York, United States: John Wiley & Sons.
3. Shilling, D.L., &Taub, H. (2008). Principles of Communication
systems. New Delhi: Mc-Graw Hill Publication.
Suggested E-Resources:
1. Digital Communication by Prof. Bikash Kumar Dey, Department of
Electrical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101051/

ECE 304L Digital Communication Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes: After completion of this laboratory course, students

will be able to:
• Understand the concept of Sampling and various Pulse Modulation
techniques i.e. Pulse Amplitude Modulation and demodulation, Pulse
Position Modulation and demodulation and Pulse Width Modulation
and demodulation.
• Analyze the behavior of Pulse Code Modulation and demodulation.
157

• Explain the working of Digital Modulation Techniques ie: Amplitude

Shift Keying, Phase Shift Keying and Frequency Shift Keying.
List of Experiments:
1. Familiarization with the lab instruments.
2. To understand the operation of Pulse amplitude modulation and
demodulation system
3. To study Pulse width modulation system
4. To study Pulse width demodulation system.
5. To understand the principle of Pulse code demodulation system
6. To study the operation of Pulse position modulation system
7. To study Pulse position demodulation system.
8. Study of amplitude shift keying modulator and demodulator
9. Study of frequency shift keying modulator and demodulator
10. Study of phased shift keying modulator and demodulator

ECE 305 Microwave Engineering

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Understand various parameters of waveguide and use of component as
per applications
• Design impedance matching network for any transmission line or
system
• Analyse and find applications and limitations of microwave
Semiconductor devices.
• Find various applications of microwave engineering in specific area
Section- A
Introduction to Microwaves & its application, Microwave Electromagnetic
spectrum, Transmission Lines: General equation, input impedance,
characteristic impedance, reflection and transmission coefficient, standing
158

wave ratio, resonant and anti-resonant line impedance matching, Matching

techniques: single stub, double stub, quarter wave transformer, baluns,
coaxial transmission line, Planar transmission line: Strip line, Microstrip
line, Slot line etc.
Section-B
Wave Guides: Wave propagation in rectangular wave guide: solution of TE
and TM modes, Power Transmission and Attenuation, Excitation of modes
in rectangular waveguide, Circular Waveguide: Basic idea of TE and TM
modes, Rectangular and Circular cavity resonators, Q of cavity resonators,
S parameters and its conversion with Z and Y parameters, Wave guide
coupling, Microwave passive Components: S- parameter representation and
analysis of microwave components such as Waveguide Tees, Two-hole
directional coupler, attenuators, Phase shifters, Microwave propagation in
ferrites: Faraday rotation, Isolators, Circulators.
Section-C
Microwave Tubes: Limitations of Conventional vacuum tubes at
microwave, Klystron: Construction and operation of two cavity and multi-
cavity klystrons, Applegate Diagram and application of two cavity klystron,
Construction and working of Reflex klystron, Magnetron: Types of
magnetron,Construction, Operation and Analysis of cavity or travelling
wave magnetron, Traveling wave tubes (TWT): Construction, Operation
and practical consideration of helical type TWT, Applications of TWT,
Microwave Semiconductor Devices: Tunnel diodes, principle of operation
and application of tunnel diodes, Transferred Electron devices: Gunn-Effect
diodes, Two-valley theory, Mode of operations of Gunn diode, Avalanche
Transit-Time devices: IMPATT, TRAPATT.
Recommended Books:
1. Liao, S.Y. (1995). Microwave devices & Circuits. New Delhi:
Prentice Hall Publication.
2. Rizzi, P.A. (1998). Microwave Engineering. New Delhi: Prentice
Hall Publication.
3. Collins, R. E. (1992). Foundation of Microwave Engineering. New
Delhi:McGraw Hill Publication.
4. Pozar, David M. (2008). Microwave Engineering. New Delhi: Wiley
Publication.
159

Suggested E- Recourses:
1. Microwave Theory and Techniques by Prof. Girish Kumar, Indian
Institute of Technology, Bombay.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101112/
2. Basic Building Blocks of Microwave Engineering by Dr Amitabha
Bhattacharya, Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117105130/
3. Transmission Lines and E.M. Waves by Prof. R. K. Shivgaonkar,
Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101056/

ECE 305L Microwave Engineering Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes: After completion of this laboratory course, students

will be able to:
• Understand the concept and working of microwave bench and
different components connected on a bench.
• Analyze the behaviour of various microwave components.
• Verify properties/ characteristic of microwave source, tees and
directional coupler.
List of Experiments:
1. Determine the operating frequency of reflex klystron.
2. Draw the V-I characteristics of Reflex klystron
3. Draw the characteristics of attenuator
4. To verify the wave-guide law
5. To study the directivity and coupling coefficient of Directional
Coupler.
6. To study the properties of magic Tea and also determine isolation and
coupling coefficient.
7. To Measure the VSWR of (i) Short circuit (ii) Open circuit (iii)
Matched Load (iv) Unmatched Load.
160

8. To study the properties of E-plane and H-plane Tea. Determine

isolation and coupling coefficient

EIE 310 Process Control

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Understand the basic principles & importance of process control in
industrial process plants
• Understand the use of block diagrams & the mathematical basis for the
design of control systems;
• Design and tune process (PID) controllers and Use appropriate tools for
the modelling of plant dynamics and the design of well-tuned control
loops
• Specify safety required in instrumentation, use of control techniques to
ensure that well-tuned control is achieved and demonstrate their
knowledge in designing the control loops for these processes
• Understand the importance and application of good instrumentation for
the efficient design of process control loops for process engineering
plants.
Section A
Introduction to Process Control: Objective of Process Control, Benefits,
Difficulties and Requirements of Process control Implementation, Process
dynamics-Elements of process control, process variables, Process lag and
Control lag, Types of Dynamic Processes: Integral process,First order
process,Second order process, Dead time, Single/multicapacity, self-
Regulating /non self regulating, Linear/non linear,Degree of freedom,
Piping and Instrumentation Diagram.
Mathematical Modelling of Processes: Modeling of liquid-level process,
gas process, thermal process.Concentration response of a stirred tank,
Temperature response of a stirred tank, interacting and Non-interacting two
tank level system
161

Section B
Control Action and Controller tuning: Basic control action-
characteristics of on –off, Proportional control, Design of Integral and
Derivative Controller, Composite controller models-PD,PI and PID
controllers and comparison of these controller actions. Electronic
controllers. Response of controllers for different types of test inputs-
selection of control mode for different process with control scheme.
Optimum controller settings-Tuning of controllers by Process reaction
curve method, Continuous cycling method, damped oscillation method.
Section C
Final Control elements: Pneumatic control valve, construction details and
types, valve sizing, selection of control valves, inherent and installed
characteristics of valve,actuators and positioners.
Complex Control Techniques: Feed forward control, Ratio control,
Override control, Cascade control, Split range control, Inferential control,
Model predictive control, Adaptive control, Boiler level control, Distillation
column control, Furnace control.
Safety in Instrumentation control systems: Area and material
classification as per IEC and NEC standard, techniques used to reduce
explosion hazards, intrisinic safety and installation of intrinsically safe
systems.
Text Books:
1. Bhanot, S. (2008). Process Control-principles and applications.
Oxford publication.
2. Petruzella, F. D. (2010). Programmable logic controller (4th ed.). New
York: McGraw Hill.
3. Johnson, C. D. (2002). Process Control and Instruments Technology.
PHI Education.
4. Patranabis, D. (2008). Principles of Process Control (2nd ed.). TMH.
5. Boyer, S. (2003). SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition.
ISA Publication.
6. Gruhn,P. &Cheddie, H. (1998). Safety Shutdown systems. ISA
Publication.
162

Reference Books:
1. Liptak,B. G. (1995). Instrument engineers Handbook-Process Control
(3rd ed.). Chilton book company.
2. Liptak,B. G. (1995). Instrument engineers Handbook-Process
Measurement and Analysis (3rd ed.). Elsevier India.
3. Chidambaram, M. (2002). Computer Control of Processes. Narosa
Publication.
4. Padmanabhan, T. R. (2000). Industrial Instrumentation Principle and
Design. Springer Verlag.
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103103037/
2. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/chemical-engineering/10-450-process-
dynamics-operations-and-control-spring-2006/
3. https://www.coursera.org/courses?query=process%20control
4. https://swayam.gov.in/courses/1395-industrial-automation-and-control

EIE 310L Process Control Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Programming of Programmable Logic Controllers and its applications
in process industry.
• Design and deploy Programmable Logic Controller programs using
timers and counters.
• Design applications based on logic and arithmetic operations using
Programmable Logic Controllers.
• Implement the various real life applications using Programmable Logic
Controllers.
163

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Programmable Logic Controller: Bosch Rexroth (Indra-Control L-25) &
Mode of Programming: Ladder Logic
1. Introduction to Bosch Rexroth (Indra-Control L-25) and its
configuration procedure.
2. Draw a ladder program for tank filling process and simulate on
universal simulator kit.
3. Implementation of pump control using universal simulator kit.
4. Application of latches for implementing star-delta start-up.
5. Draw a ladder program for pole changing switch and simulate on
universal simulator kit.
6. Controlling of furnace door on universal simulator kit.
7. Write a ladder logic program for control of traffic light.
8. Automatic tablet filling on universal simulator kit.
9. Draw a ladder logic diagram for selective belt switch in process.
10. Application of level control in industrial process.
11. Application of mixing operation of two fluids in industrial process.

ECE 411 Communication Engineering

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Use different modulation and demodulation techniques used in analog
communication
• Identify and solve basic communication problems
• Analyze transmitter and receiver circuits
• Compare and contrast design issues, advantages, disadvantages and
limitations of analog communication systems
164

• Understand various spreading techniques and determine bit error

performance of various digital communication systems.
• Differentiate between different pulse modulation and demodulation
techniques and signal multiplexing for various applications.
Section A
Amplitude Modulation: Amplitude modulation and detection, Generation
and detection of DSB-SC, SSB and vestigial side band modulation, carrier
acquisition AM transmitters and receivers, superhetrodyne receiver, IF
amplifiers, AGC circuits Frequency Division multiplexing
Angle Modulation: Basic definitions Narrow band and wideband frequency
modulation, transmission bandwidth of FM Signals, Generation and
detection of frequency modulation
Section B
Sampling process. Analog Pulse Modulation Systems-Pulse Amplitude
Modulation, Quantization process, quantization noise, Pulse code
Modulation, Differential Pulse code Modulation, Delta Modulation, Types
of digital modulation, waveforms for amplitude, frequency and phase shift
keying, methods of generation of coherent and non-coherent, ASK,FSK and
PSK, comparison of above digital techniques.
Section C
Time Division Multiplexing: Fundamentals, Electronic Commulator,
Bit/byte interleaving, Tl carrier system, synchronization and signaling of
Tl, TDM and PCM hierarchy, synchronization techniques
Introduction to Information Theory: Measure of information, Entropy &
Information rate, channel capacity, Hartley Shannan law, Huffman coding,
shannanFano coding.
Text Books:
1. Haykin, S. (2006). Communication Systems (4th ed.). John Wiley
&Sons.
2. Kennedy, G. & Davis, B. (2017). Electronic Communication
systems(4th Ed.). Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Haykin, S. (2013). Digital Communications.John Wiley & Sons.
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117102059/
165

2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ee03/preview
3. https://swayamprabha.gov.in/index.php/program/current/14
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108104098/
5. https://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/117102059/
6. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106090/3

MCTR 419 Mechatronics Systems

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Develop skills to monitor and control real world industrial systems
• Implement projects for industrial and home automations
• Analyze and create own innovative filters and signal conditioning
applications
• Perform computer based controlling of industries using PLC, SCADA
and HMI
Section A
Fundamentals of Mechatronics and its Evolution, Hardware elements of
Mechatronics systems.
Introduction of Transducer: LVDT, Optical Encoder, Inductive Proximity
and Capacitive Proximity Sensor, Reed switch, Hall Effect, Photoelectric
(Through Beam, Retro reflective, Diffused Type), Thermocouples, Tactile
Sensor, Float type level switch, Smart Sensor.
Signal conditioning: Amplifiers, Passive Filters.
PC based Control: Data Acquisition System: Analog and Digital, Role of
SCADA and HMI System.
Section B
Mechanical actuation system- Kinematic chains, cams, gear-trains, Ratchet
& Pawl, dampers, Bearings, Belt Drive, Introduction to MEMS.
Electrical actuation system: Solenoids and Stepper Motors.
166

Actuators: Fluid Power, Piezoelectric Actuator, Magnetostrictive Actuator.

Electrical Drives: Conventional and Modern electrical drives,
Classifications and Applications
Section C
Case Studies of Mechatronics Systems: Additive 3-D Printer, Process
Automation, Industry 3.0, Industry 4.0.
Text Books: -
1. Isermann, R. (2006). Mechatronics Systems: fundamentals. Springer.
2. Bolton, W. (2010). Mechatronics(4th ed.). Pearson Education.
3. Sawhney, A. K. (2015). A Course in Electrical and Electronic
Measurements and Instrumentation. Dhanpat Rai Publication.
4. Nakra, B.C. &Choudhary, K.K. (2016). Instrumentation, Measurement
and Analysis (4th ed.). Tata McGraw Hill.
E-Resources:
1. https://www.edx.org/course/sensors-and-devices-in-the-iot
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108108123/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/
4. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-737-
mechatronics-fall-2014/
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104265/
6. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_me31/preview

MCTR 419L Mechatronics Systems Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 4 2

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Simulate the basic electric, hydraulic and pneumatic system using
simulation software.
• Develop an understanding of plc ladder diagram related to industrial
automation systems and measure its performance.
167

• Design Mechatronics system according to an Industrial Applications.

• Combine the real time control systems with peripheral devices through
programmable interface techniques.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of Modular Mechatronics System (MMS) and its components.
2. To design and assemble the components of distribution or feeding
station.
3. To design and assemble the components of testing station.
4. To design and assemble the components of sorting station.
5. To study different modes of operation of a six axis industrial robot.
6. To study about Selective Compliance Articulated Robotic Arm
(SCARA) station.
7. To study about IOT and RFID application in Mechatronics System.
8. To study and control different parameters in process automation.

ELE 410 Digital Signal Processing

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 3 1 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Demonstrate the analytical representation of discrete time signals.
• Apply techniques in time and frequency ___domain to the analysis and
design of discrete time systems.
• Analyze discrete time systems in both time and frequency ___domain.
• Design and analysis of the frequency response of discrete-time signals
and systems.
• Design, Analyze and Implement Digital IIR and FIR filters.
Section A
Introduction of Signals, Systems and Signal Processing, Classification of
Signals and Systems, Advantages of digital over analog Signal processing,
Signal Models - Continuous Time versus Discrete time signals, Periodic
168

and aperiodic Signals, Phasor Signals and Spectra, Energy and Power
Signals, System Modeling Concepts, The superposition integral for Fixed
and Linear Systems, Impulse Response of a Fixed and Linear System -
Fourier Series - Trigonometric Series- Exponential Fourier Series-
Symmetry Properties of the Fourier Coefficients. Fourier Integral, Energy
Spectral Density, Fourier Transforms in the Limit, Fourier Transform
Theorems and Pairs, System Analysis with Fourier Transform, Lap lace
Transform Theorems, Network Analysis using the Lap lace Transform.
Section B
Discrete Time Signals and Systems- Review of Sampled Data Systems,
Time Domain Representations of Discrete Time Signals, Frequency
Domain Representation of Discrete Time Signals, Discrete Time Signals
obtained by sampling, Discrete Fourier Transform. Z-Transform -
Definition and Examples, Inverse Z-Transform, Properties of the Z-
Transform, Introduction to Realization of Digital Systems - Block
Diagrams and Signal Flow Graphs. Introduction to Realization of
an IIR and FIR systems, Discrete Fourier Transforms (DFT)
and Fast Fourier Transform (FFT).
Section C
Design of Digital Filters: Introduction to Filters, A comparison of IIR and
FIR Digital Filters. Design of IIR Digital Filters –Impulse Invariant
Transformation, Bilinear Transformation, Design of Digital Butter
worth and Chebyshev Filters. Design of FIR Digital Filters - Windowing
and Rectangular Window, Filter Designs using Windows,
Frequency Sampling Technique. DSP tools and DSP techniques in various
applications.
Text Books:
1. Johnson J. R. (1998).Introduction to Digital Signal Processing.India:
Prentice-Hall
2. Oppenheim , A. V., Willsky, A. S. &Nawab, H.S. (1996). Signal &
Systems.India: Prentice-Hall.
3. Proakis J. G. &Manolakis, D. G. (2007). Digital Signal Processing:
Principles, Algorithms,
and Applications (4th ed.). India: Prentice-Hall
169

e-Resources:
1. https://swayam.gov.in/course/3674-discrete-time-signal-processing
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117102060/1
3. https://swayam.gov.in/courses/5452-jan-2019-principles-of-signals-
and-systems
4. https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-008-digital-signal-processing-
spring-2011/
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104070/
6. http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/11/digital-signal-processing.html
7. http://jpkc.gnnu.cn/jpkc/Signal/ziliaoxiazai/Oppenheim%20%20Signal
s%20And%20Systems%20(Complete).pdf

ELE 304L Digital Signal Processing Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Able to generate elementary signals/ waveforms and perform
arithmetic operations on signals.
• Able to plot frequency response of a given system and verify the
properties of LTI system
• Able to carry out simulation of DSP systems.
• Able to demonstrate the applications of FFT to DSP.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Write a program in MATLAB to generate the following functions: Unit
Impulse, Unit Step, Unit Ramp, Sinusoidal, Exponential, Random
signal.
2. Write a program in MATLAB to study the basic operations on the
discrete time signals: Amplitude Scaling, Time Shifting, Time Scaling,
Folding, addition and multiplication of two signals.
170

3. Write a program in MATLAB to check for linearity, causality and

stability of discrete time system.
4. Write a program in MATLAB to perform Linear Convolution.
5. Write a program in MATLAB to perform Circular Convolution.
6. Write a program in MATLAB to perform the Discrete Fourier
transform for the given sequences.
7. Write a program in MATLAB to perform Inverse Discrete Fourier
transform for the given sequences.
8. Write a program in MATLAB to design analog Butterworth filter for
the given specifications.
9. Write a program in MATLAB to design analog Chebyshev filter for the
given specifications.
10. Write a program in MATLAB to find frequency ___domain response
(magnitude and phase response) for the given IIR and FIR systems.

EEE 404 Switchgear and Protection

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Design the feasible protection systems needed for each main part of a
power system
• Understand different applications of the relays, circuit breakers,
grounding for different elements of power system
• Understand characteristics of different type of relays
• Design the ratings for fuses according to the requirement
• Elucidate various protection schemes of various power system
components like alternators, transformers and bus-bars
• Understand various methods of over voltage protection in power
systems
171

Section A
Introduction to Protection System: Introduction to protection system and
its elements, functions of protective relaying, protective zones, primary and
backup protection, desirable qualities of protective relaying, basic
terminology.
Relays: Electromagnetic, attracted and induction type relays, thermal relay,
gas actuated relay, design considerations of electromagnetic relay.
Relay Application and Characteristics: Amplitude and phase
comparators, duality, over current relays, directional relays, distance relays,
differential relay.
Section B
Static Relays: Comparison with electromagnetic relay, classification and
their description, over current relays, directional relay, distance relays,
differential relay.
Protection Of Transmission Line: Over current protection, distance
protection, pilot wire protection, carrier current protection, protection of
bus, auto reclosing.
Section C
Circuit Breaker: Properties of arc, arc extinction theories, re-striking
voltage transient, current chopping, resistance switching, capacitive current
interruption, short line interruption, circuit breaker ratings.
Testing Of Circuit Breaker: Classification, testing station and
equipments, testing procedure, direct and indirect testing, Operating modes,
selection of circuit breakers, constructional features and operation of Bulk
Oil, Minimum Oil, Air Blast, SF6, Vacuum and DC circuit breakers.
Text Books:
1. Ram, B. &Vishwakarma, D. N. (2017). Power System Protection and
Switchgear (2nd ed.).Tata Mc. Graw Hill.
2. Ravindranath, B. &Chander, M. (2018). Power system Protection and
Switchgear.
(2nd ed.). New Age International Publishers
3. Rao, S. S. (2008). Switchgear and Protection. Khanna Publishers.
172

Reference Books:
1. Paithankar, Y. G. &Bhide, S. R. (2013) Fundamentals of Power System
Protection.
(2nd ed.). India, Prentice Hall.
2. Rao, T. S. M. (2017). Power System Protection: Static Relays with
Microprocessor
Applications. (2nd ed.). Tata Macgraw Hill”.
3. Warringtaon, A.R. V. C. (2014). Protective Relays- Their Theory and
Practice,
Vol. I & II. Springer.
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/downloads/108101039/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101039/3
3. http://www.vssut.ac.in/lecture_notes/lecture1425873259.pdf
4. https://electrical-engineering-portal.com/transformer-feeder-protection

EEE 411L Switchgear and Protection Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1
Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• Assemble & de-assemble air circuit breaker
• Understand interconnection of contractor & MCCB
• Apply accurate protection scheme through ETU
• Implement soft starting for 3-phase induction motor
• Apply star-delta starting for 3-phase induction motor
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of 3WL air circuit breaker.
2. Study of 3WT air circuit breaker.
3. Study of molded case circuit breaker (MCCB).
4. Study of electronic trip unit (ETU).
5. Soft starting of 3-phase induction motor.
173

6. Study of Type-II coordination for contactors.

7. Study and operation of timer & relay.
8. Study and operation of star-delta starter.

MCTR 408 Computer Integrated Manufacturing System

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To apply the concepts to manufacturing industries to automate its
various functions.
• To perform various operations on CNC machines in a manufacturing
industry.
• To increase the productivity of a manufacturing industry.
• To perform all of the functions of a manufacturing industry with high
accuracy and quality.
• To design automated material handling and storage system in a
manufacturing industry.
• To apply the concepts of computer aided production management in a
manufacturing industry.
Section A
Introduction to CIM: Definition, needs and benefits of CIM, its hardware
and software, nature and types of manufacturing systems.
Product development through CIM: Product development Cycle, Rapid
prototyping, Techniques to reduce the lead time and manufacturability.
Numerical Control (NC) and Computer Numerical Control (CNC): Basic
components of an NC system, coordinate system and motions control
systems. Applications, advantages and disadvantages.
NC Part programming: Manual and computer assisted part programming,
Part programming with APT. Features of CNC, machine control unit, Direct
174

Numerical Control and Distributed Numerical Control. Adaptive control of

machining system.
Section B
Computer Aided Process Planning: Process planning, structure of process
planning software, Information required for process planning.
Group Technology: Introduction, part families, part classification and
coding, coding system and machining cells. Optiz classification system,
process selection, Decision table and Decision trees, Method for process
planning, Generative, and Variant process planning, Retrieval process
planning system, Implementation considerations.
Networking Fundamentals for CIM: Ethernet, LAN, Managing remote
systems in a network.
Material Handling and Storage: Automatic Guided Vehicle (AGV),
Automatic Storage & Retrieval System (ASRS). Robots in CIM.
Section C
Computer Aided Production Management Systems: Computer process
monitoring and shop floor control, phases, factory data collection.
System-automatic identification methods: Bar code & RFID technology,
automated data collection system, computer process control.
Planning of Resources for Manufacturing through Information Systems:
Role of MRP II in CIM systems, Common terminologies in MRP-II
environment, Enterprise resource planning, supply chain management.
Computer Aided Quality Control: Contact inspection methods, Non-contact
inspection methods, Coordinate Measuring Machine, Post process
metrology, optical and non-optical computer aided testing, Computer aided
inspection by robot.
Text Book:-
1. Mikell, P. Groover. Automation, Production Systems, and Computer
Integrated Manufacturing (3rd ed.). Pearson/Prentice Hall.
2. Radhakrishnan, P., Subramanyam, S., & Raju, V. (2013).
CAD/CAM/CIM (3rd ed.). New Age Publisher.
3. Rao, P.N. CAD/CAM: Principles and Applications. McGraw Hill
4. Rao, Tiwari & Kundra. Computer aided Manufacturing. Tata McGraw
Hill.
175

5. Mikell P. Groover & Emory W. Zimmers. CAD/CAM: Computer-

Aided Design and Manufacturing. Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
Reference Books:-
1. James A. Rehg & Henry W. Kraebber. Computer-Integrated
Manufacturing (3rd ed.). Pearson/Prentice Hall.
2. Chang, Wysk& Wang. Computer Aided Manufacturing. Pearson
Education.
3. Koren, Y. Computer Control of Manufacturing Systems. McGraw Hill.
4. Quesada & Jeyepoovan. Computer Numerical Control: Machining and
Turning Centres. Pearson Education.
e-Resources:-
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112102101/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112102103/16
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105211/
4. https://www.edx.org/course/fundamentals-manufacturing-processes-
mitx-2-008x-0
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104265/

MCTR 408L Computer Integrated Manufacturing

System Lab
Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To control the robot operations in real environment manually as well as
using simulation software.
• To manufacture the complex objects by computer assisted part
programming.
• To perform various operations on CNC machines in a manufacturing
industry.
• To apply the basics of Gantry system to pick and place robots.
176

• To design Vision Inspection System for several parametric inspections

of the specimens.
• To design various automatic material handling systems.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Introduction to Aristo robot manual offline commands.
2. Aristo Sim software Simulation for robot operations.
3. Study of CIM offline and online programming.
4. Operation and Programming on CNC Milling.
5. Operation and Programming on CNC Turning.
6. Introduction and operation of Gantry Systems and calibration of
loading and unloading of objects.
7. Introduction and operation of Vision Inspection System for several
parametric inspections of the specimens.
8. Introduction and operating of ASRS and AGV.

ECE 409 Antenna Analysis

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Recall electromagnetic plane waves. Apply principles of
electromagnetic to explain antenna radiation. Explain various antenna
parameters.
• Explain antenna as a point source. Design antenna patterns for different
cases.
• Explain dipole antennas. Establish mathematical equations for various
parameters of thin linear antenna.
• Explain loop, slot, patch and horn antennas. Derive expressions for the
parameters of loop and slot antennas.
177

Section-A
Introduction to antenna, Radiation Mechanism, Current Distribution on a
Thin Wire Antenna
Fundamental parameters of antenna: Radiation pattern, Radiation power
density, Radiation intensity, Beamwidth, Directivity, Antenna efficiency,
Gain, Beam efficiency, Bandwidth, Polarization, Input impedance, Antenna
radiation efficiency, Antenna vector effective length, Maximum directivity
and Maximum effective area, Friis transmission equation and radar range
equation
Section-B
Radiation Integrals and Auxiliary Potential Functions: The Vector Potential
A for an Electric Current Source J, The Vector Potential F for a Magnetic
Current Source M, Electric and Magnetic Fields for Electric (J) and
Magnetic (M)Current Sources, Solution of the Inhomogeneous Vector
Potential Wave Equation, Far-field radiation, Duality theorem, Reciprocity
and Reaction theorem, Image Theory
Linear wire antennas: Infinitesimal dipole, Small dipole, Region separation,
Finite length dipole, Half-wave dipole
Loop Antennas: Small circular loop, Square loop
Section-C
Introduction to Arrays, two-element array, N-element linear array: uniform
amplitude and spacing, directivity, N-element linear array: uniform spacing,
non-uniform amplitude
Traveling wave antennas: Long wire antenna, V-antenna, rhombic antenna
Broadband antennas: Helical antenna, Folded dipole, Yagi-uda array of
linear elements
Log-periodic antenna, Introduction to Horn antenna: E-plane sectoral horn,
H-plane sectoral horn, Pyramidal horn
Recommended Books:
1. Balanis, C. A. (2005). Antenna Theory Analysis and Design. New
Delhi: John Wiley & Sons.
2. Eliott, Robert S. (2003). Antenna Theory and Design. New Delhi:
Wiley-IEEE Press.
3. Kraus, J. D., & Marhefka, R. H. (2001). Antennas for All Applications,
Singapore: McGraw-Hill Publication.
178

4. Harrington, R. F. (2001). Time-Harmonic Electromagnetic Fields.

New Delhi: Wiley-IEEE Press.
Suggested E- resources:
1. Advanced Antenna Theory by Dr Amalendu Patnaik, Indian Institute
of Technology, Roorkee. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117107035/
2. Analysis and Design Principles of Microwave Antennas by Prof.
Amitabha Bhattacharya, Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105114/
3. Antennas by Prof. Girish Kumar, Indian Institute of Technology,
Bombay. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101092/

ECE 409L Antenna Analysis Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes: After completion of this laboratory course, students

will be able to:
• Use HFSS tool to design and analysis of antennas.
• Design various type of antennas
• Measure and analyse radiation pattern of antennas.
List of Experiments:
1. To design dipole antenna in HFSS
2. Design monopole antenna in HFSS
3. Design horn antenna in HFSS
4. To measure radiation pattern of Horn Antenna
5. To measure radiation pattern of log periodic Antenna
6. To measure radiation pattern of micro strip patch Antenna
7. To measure radiation pattern of YAGI-UDA Antenna.
179

ECE 402 Fiber Optics and Communication

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Explain the light propagation through optical fibers.
• Explain the various light sources and optical detectors.
• Design fiber optic transmitter and receiver system.
Section A
Fiber optics: Introduction, optical fibers -geometrical Optics description,
wave propagation, fiber modes, step index, graded index single and
multimode fibers, dispersion, limitation on bit rate, fiber bandwidth, fiber
loss, fiber manufacturing: design issue, fabrication methods, cables and
connectors, fiber splicing and fiber couplers.
Section B
Optical Sources and detectors: Light-Emitting diodes: LED
characteristics, modulation response, LED structures. Semiconductor
Lasers: structures, Laser characteristics, single longitude mode operation,
DFB and VCSEL laser, Receivers: photo detector design: P-N, PIN,
Schottky barrier and Avalanche photodiode, Phototransistor, receiver noise:
noise mechanisms in PIN and APD receivers, Receiver structures.
Section C
Optical Fiber Systems: optical transmitter circuit: source limitations, LED
and Laser drive circuits, Optical receiver circuit, system design
considerations, Digital systems, Digital optical receiver, BER, Optical
power budgeting, rise time budget, line coding, analog systems: Direct
intensity modulation, subcarrier intensity modulation, coherent systems,
computer, sensor and military applications.
Recommended Books:
1. Agarwal, Govind. P. (2007). Fiber-Optic Communication Systems.
New Delhi: Wiley India.
2. Senior, John.M. (2009). Optical Fiber Communication Principles &
Practice. New Delhi: PHI Publication.
180

3. Bhattacharya, Pallab. (2002). Semiconductor Optoelectronics Devices.

New Delhi: PHI Publication.
4. Keiser, Gerd. (1991). Optical Fiber Communication. New Delhi:
McGraw Hill Publication.

ECE 402L Fiber Optics and Communication Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes: After completion of this laboratory course, students

will be able to:
• Understand the characteristics of an optical fiber and LED.
• Understand and measure the basic properties of propagation of light in
dielectric Optical fibre including losses, attenuation and coupling.
• Explain the working of optical power meter and various sensors.
List of experiments:
1. To study Analog Link.
2. To study Digital link.
3. To measure Numerical aperture.
4. To study Propagation Loss.
5. To study Bending Loss.
6. To study EYE Pattern.
7. To calculate BER.
8. To study the characteristics of optical source.
9. To study the characteristics of Optical detector.

VLSI 401 VLSI Design

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4
181

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Explain the basic theory of crystal growth, wafer fabrication and IC
fabrication technology.
• Explain the different VLSI design styles, overview of ICs and
fabrication steps of MOS, CMOS and BJT.
• Design and analyse the output characteristics of different MOS
inverters
• Design combinational and sequential circuit.
Section A
Recapitulation of basics, semiconductor devices, orientation effect,
impurities, defects, Fabrication: Crystal growth & wafer preparation,
Epitaxial growth, oxidation, photo-lithography, etching technology (wet &
dry), Diffusion Fick’s law, chemical vapor deposition, CVD reactors, ion
implantation, metallization & patterning, photo resistive material,
packaging.
Section B
Overview of VLSI methodologies, VLSI design flow, type of ICs
(monolithic, thick film, thin film, hybrid), Fabrication steps involve in,
different type of resisters, capacitor, diode, transistor (Darlington etc),
JFET, MOSFET, isolation technique used in fabrication, fabrication of
typical circuits.
Section C
Digital CMOs circuit, MOS devices, V-I characteristics, Design & detailed
analysis of MOS inverters (resistive load, enhancement load, depletion
load, CMOS), delay & power analysis, Design layout of simple CMOS
gates.
Circuit implementation of combinational circuit, circuit implementation of
sequential circuits - FFs, SRAM, DRAM.
Recommended Books:
1. Sze, S.M.(2017). VLSI Technology. New Delhi: TMH Publications.
2. Kang, S.M., &Leblebici, Y. (2002). CMOS digital Integrated Circuits
Analysis & Design. New Delhi: McGraw Hill Publications.
182

3. Botkar, K. R. (2004). Integrated Circuits. New Delhi: Khanna

Publishers.
4. Gandhi, S.K. (1994). VLSI Fabrication Principle Silicon and Gallium
Arsenide. New Delhi: Willey Publications.
5. Plummer, J., Deal, M., & Griffin, P. (2000). Silicon VLSI Technology:
Fundamentals, Practice and Modeling. New Delhi: Pearson
Publications.
6. Sarrafazadeh, M.,& Wong, C.K. (1996). An introduction to VLSI
Physical Design. New Delhi: McGraw Hill Publication.
7. Ken, Martin. (1999). Digital Integrated Circuits Design. New York,
United State: Oxford University Press.
8. Neil, H.E., Weste, &Eshraghian, Kamran (1994). Principle of CMOS
VLSI Design. Boston, New York: Addison Wesley Publication.
Suggested E-Resources:
1. VLSI Circuits by Prof. S. Srinivasan, Department of Electrical
Engineering, IIT-Madras. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106092/1
2. VLSI Technology by Dr. Nandita Das Gupta, Department of Electrical
Engineering, IIT-Madras. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101058/

VLSI 402L VLSI Design Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes: After completion of this laboratory course, students

will be able to:
• Use VHDL for design of digital circuits
• Model complex digital systems at several level of abstractions;
behavioral and structural, synthesis and rapid system prototyping.
• Develop and simulate register-level models of hierarchical digital
systems
List of experiments:
1. Write a program for the implementation of half adder and Full adder.
2. Write a program for implementing half subtractor and full subtractor.
183

3. Write a program for implementing MUX 4x1 and DEMUX (1X4)

4. Write a program for implementing Encoder and Decoder.
5. Write a program to implement gray code to binary code converter and
vice versa.
6. Write a program to implement COMPARATOR.
7. Write a program for the implementation of S-R Flip flop and D Flip
flop.
8. Write a program for the implement up-counter and down-counter.
9. Write a program to design JK Flip-flop and write design summary
10. Write a program to design T Flip-flop and write design summary

ECE 303 Communication Networks

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Recognize and describe about the working of Computer Networks.
• Illustrate reference models with layers, protocols and interfaces.
• Combine and distinguish functionalities of different Layers.
• Model the LAN and WAN configuration using different media
Section A
Introduction to communication systems and data communications.
Introduction of network, requirement of Internet. Data Networking,
Network history, Local area network topologies, WAN, MAN,VPN,
(Virtual Private Network). Bandwidth, Bandwidth data rate. Multiplexing-
TDM, FDM, CDMA, data encoding. Network model-layer structure of
network model. OSI Model, OSI layers. TCP/IP Model layers. Arpanet,
Peer to Peer communication. Communication Media and cable-structure-
through wire-copper cable-STP, UTP, co-axial cable, optical fiber. Wireless
media-wireless LAN, organization and standards. Wireless devices and
topologies. Wireless communication, wireless security.
184

Section B
Network layer devices-Modem, NIC, hub, bridge, switch, router, firewall,
gateway. Switching Networks-circuit switching, Packet Switching.
Networks-Circuit Switching, Packet Switching. Networks addressing
schemes-MAC Address, Subneting, Superneting. Routing Concept, Routing
protocol (RIP), Routed protocols. Introduction to IPV6 Principles of
Internetworking. Ethernet (CSMA/CD) Token Ring and FDDI, Fast
Ethernet.
Section C
Layer protocol Structure. Data link control – Flow Control, Error Detection,
Error Control. HDLC. Network layer-ARP, RARP, ICMP. Effect of
Congestion and Congestion Control in Network-(Back pressure, choke
packet, Implicit Congestion Signaling, Explicit Congestion Signaling.
Traffic Management- Transport layer Protocols-connection oriented and
connectionless services, TCP, TCP Congestion Control and Flow Control.
UDP. Application Layer Protocols – HTTP, FTP, SMTP, SNMP, Telnet.
Introduction to ISDN. Narrow Band and Broad Band. Introduction to WAN
Technologies. ATM and Frame relay.
Recommended Books:
1. Jordan, E.C.(1986). Electromagnetic Wave & Radiating System. New
Delhi: PHI Publication.
2. Tanenbaum, A.S. (1997). Computer Networks. New Delhi: Pearson
Publication.
3. Stailling, W. (1997). Data & Computer Communication. New Delhi:
PHI Publication.
4. Martin, J. (1998). Computer Networks and Distributed Processing
Software, Techniques, Architecture. New Delhi: PHI Publication.
Suggested E-Resources:
1. Computer Networks and Internet Protocol by Prof. Soumya Kanti
Ghosh Department of Computer Science and Engineering Indian
Institute of Technology, Kharagpur. https://nptel.ac.in/courses
/106105183/
185

2. Computer Networks by Prof. Sujoy Ghosh, Department of Computer

Science and Technology, IIT KG. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/
106105081/
3. Computer Networks by Prof. Hema A Murthy, IIT Madras.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106091/
4. Data Communication by Prof. Ajit Pal, IIT KG.
https://freevideolectures.com/course/2278/data-communication
186

Discipline Electives
EIE 408 Artificial Neural Network and Fuzzy logic
Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To comprehend the concepts of feed forward neural networks
• To analyze the various feedback networks.
• To understand the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems and
fuzzy set theory.
• To comprehend the fuzzy logic control and adaptive fuzzy logic and to
design the fuzzy control using genetic algorithm.
• To analyze the application of fuzzy logic control to real time systems.
Section A
Introduction: Evolution, biological neurons and synapses, characteristics
of artificial neuralnetwork (ANN), types of activation function;Neuron
model McCulloch-Pitts model, Hebbian hypothesis; learning and
limitations of single-layered neural networks.
Section B
Perceptron: Perceptron representation, concept of linear separability,
limitation of perceptron, Perceptron learning algorithms.
Multi-Layer Feed-forward Neural Networks: Multi-layer perceptrons,
supervised learning, Approximation and interpolation of functions. Back-
propagation learning law.
Adaptive Resonance Theory: Network configuration, characteristics,
learning.
Section C
Fuzzy Logic: Introduction -uncertainty and information, fuzzy sets and
membership.Classical set and fuzzy sets: operation and properties, classical
relations and fuzzy relations:operation and properties, membership value
assignments:max–min method.Features of membership function, standard
forms and boundaries, fuzzification,defuzzification methods: max
187

membership principle,centroid method, weighted average method, mean-

max membership.
Development of membership functions: Intuition, inference, neural
networks.
Fuzzy rule based systems: Natural language, linguistic hedges, rule based
system, graphical techniques of inference.
Fuzzy control system: Simple fuzzy logic controller, basic fuzzy tipping
problem.
Text Books:
1. Haykin, S.S. (2008). Neural Networks. Pearson Publication.
2. Ross,T. J. (2016). Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications(4th ed.).
Wiley.
Reference Books:
1. Fausett,L. V. (1993). Fundamental of Neural Network Architecture and
Application. Pearson Publication.
2. Zurada, J. M. (2004). Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems.
JaicoPublishing House.
3. Kumar,S. (2007). Neural Networks: A Classroom Approach. TMH.
4. Sivanandam,S., Sumathi,S. &Deepa,S. N. (2006). Introduction to
neural networks using MATLAB 6.0. Tata McGraw Hill Education
India.
e-Resources:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_ge07/preview
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117105084/
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/brain-and-cognitive-sciences/9-641j-
introduction-to-neural-networks-spring-2005/
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108104049/16
188

EEE 402 Energy Efficiency and Conservation

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To understand the basic principles of Energy conservation
• To interpret about Concept and Scope of Demand Side Management
• To describe the Distribution System.
• To know about Efficiency in Motors and Lighting system.
Section A
Energy conservation:-Principles of Energy Conservation, Energy
conservation Planning Energy conservation in small scale industries, Large
scale industries and in electrical generation, transmission and distribution,
Energy conservation Legislation Energy Audit:-Aim of energy Audit,
Strategy of Energy Audit, Energy management Team Considerations in
energy conservation Ac. Buildings, Economic analysis. Programme,
Instruments for energy audit, Energy audit of System
Section B
Demand Side Management:-Concept and Scope of Demand Side
Management, Evolution of Demand Side Management, DSM Strategy
Planning. Implementation and its application. Customer Acceptance & its
implementation issues. National and International Experiences with DSM
Voltage and Reactive power in Distribution System:- Voltage and reactive
power calculations and control: Voltage classes and nomenclature, voltage
drop calculations, Voltage control, VAR requirements and power factor,
Capacitors unit and bank rating lion of capacitors and switching, Controls
for switched capacitors and fields testing.
Section C
Efficiency in Motors and Lighting system:- Load scheduling/shifting,
Motor drives- motor efficiency testing, energy efficient motors, and motor
speed control. Lighting- lighting levels, efficient options, fixtures, day
lighting, timers, Energy efficient windows. UPS selection, Installation
operation and maintenance. Indian Electricity Act 1956, Distribution Code
and Bill
189

Text Books
1. Tripathy, S. C. (1980). Electric Energy Utilization and conservation.
Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Gyftopoulos, E. P (1982). Industrial Energy Conservation Manuals.
Atlanta:Fairmont Press.
3. Dryden, I. G. C. (2013). The Efficient Use of Energy (2nd ed.).
Butterworth-Heinemann.
Reference Books
1. Tumer, W. C. (1982).Energy Management Handbook. New York:
Wiley.
2. Witte,L. C., Schmidt,P. S. &Brown, D.R. (1988). Industrial Energy
Management and Utilization. Washington: Hemisphere Publication.
3. Longland, T. (1984). Power Capacitor Handbook. Butterworth & Co
(Publishers) Ltd
4. Lazar, I. (1980). Electrical Systems Analysis and Design for Industrial
Plants. McGraw-Hill Book Company.
e-Resources:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_mm17/preview
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105102175/
3. https://beeindia.gov.in/

EIE 415 Nonlinear Control System

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To demonstrate non-linear system behavior by phase plane and
describing function methods
• To perform the stability analysis nonlinear systems by Lyapunov
method develop design skills in optimal control problems
190

• To derive discrete-time mathematical models in both time ___domain

(difference equations, state equations) and zdomain (transfer function
using z-transform).
• To predict and analyze transient and steady-state responses and
stability and sensitivity of both open-loop and closed-loop linear, time-
invariant, discrete-time control systems.
Section A
Introduction to Nonlinear Control: Characteristics of nonlinear systems,
common nonlinearities in control systems, linearization approximations-
Taylor series method and Jacobian method, effect of linearization on
nonlinear system performance, analytical method of analysis: Poincare
perturbation method.
Section B
Describing Function Analysis:Describing functions of common
nonlinearities use of the describing function to determine system stability.
Phase Plane Analysis: Phase portraits, singular points, construction of
phase portraits, method of isoclines, delta method, jump resonance, limit
cycles, existence of limit cycles, Poincare-Bendixson theorem, and
evaluation of time from phase trajectory.
Section C
Lyapunov’s method of Analysis:Nonlinear systems and equilibrium
points, concepts of stability, local stability, Lyapunov’s direct method, and
equilibrium point theorems, Krasovskii’s method- Variable gradient
method.
Nonlinear Control System Design: Sliding mode control, model reference
adaptive control.
Text Books:
1. Slotine, J.E. (1991). Applied Nonlinear Control. New Jersey,Prentice
Hall
2. Vidyasagar, M. (1978). Nonlinear System Analysis. New Jersey,
Prentice Hall.
3. Gopal,M. (2003). Digital Control & State variable Methods. Tata-Mc-
Graw hill.
191

e-Resources:-
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106024/
2. http://web.mit.edu/nsl/www/videos/lectures.html
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-003-modeling-
dynamics-and-control-i-spring-2005/study-materials/nonlinear_cont/
4. https://web.stanford.edu/class/engr209a/

EIE 402 Digital Control System

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To have in-depth knowledge and critical understanding of the theory
and principles of digital control systems and their applications
• To distinguish the specific characteristics and differences of
discrete/digital, hybrid and analog systems.
• To transform an analog system to discrete and vice versa
• To analyze the behavior of a discrete system in time ___domain and in
frequency ___domain
• To design and synthesize controllers that will be implemented using
digital hardware.
• To apply digital control systems’ principles and techniques to discrete
or continuous time systems.
Section A
Signal Processing in Digital Control: Basic digital control system,
advantages of digital control and implementation problems, basic discrete
time signals, z- transform and inverse z-transform, modeling of sample-hold
circuit. Pulse transfer function, solution of difference equation by z-
Transform method.
192

Design of Digital Control Algorithms: Steady state accuracy, transient

response and frequency response specifications, digital compensator design
using frequency response plots and root locus plots.
Section B
State Space Analysis and Design: State space representation of digital
control system, conversion of state variable models to transfer functions and
vice versa, solution of state difference equations, controllability and
observability design of digital control system with state feedback.
Section C
Stability ofDiscrete System: Stability on the Z-plane and Jury stability
criterion, bilinear transformation, Routh stability criterion on rth plane,
Lyapunov's Stability in the sense of Lyapunov’s, stability theorems for
continuous and discrete systems, stability analysis using Lyapunov's
method.
Optimal digital control: Discrete Euler Lagrange equation, max. min
principle, optimality Dynamic programming, Different types of problem
and their solutions.
Text Books:
1. Slotine, J.E. (1991). Applied Nonlinear Control. New Jersey,Prentice
Hall
2. Vidyasagar, M. (1978). Nonlinear System Analysis. New Jersey,
Prentice Hall.
3. Gopal,M. (2003). Digital Control & State variable Methods. Tata-Mc-
Graw hill.
Reference Books:
1. Slotine, J.E. (1991). Applied Nonlinear Control. New Jersey,Prentice
Hall
2. Gopal,M. (2003). Digital Control & State variable Methods. Tata-Mc-
Graw hill.
3. Vidyasagar, M. (1978). Nonlinear System Analysis. New Jersey,
Prentice Hall.
193

e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108103008/
2. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-171-analysis-
and-design-of-digital-control-systems-fall-2006/

EIE 401 Analytical Instrumentation

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To understand the basic principles & importance of Analytical
Instruments in industrial process plants
• To understand the use of block diagrams for the design of analytical
and industrial instruments.
• To understand the importance and application of various
chromatographic techniques.
• To understand the importance of Environmental Pollution monitoring
instruments.
Section A
UV-Visible Spectroscopy: Introduction, Electromagnetic Radiation and
Spectrum, Beer’s Law, Atomic techniques-emission, absorption and
fluorescence, Radiation Sources: Continuum Sources, Line Sources and
Laser Sources. Wavelength selectors: Optical Filters and Monochromators,
Sample Holder, Radiation Detectors: Photon Transducers (Phototube,Photo
voltaic cell and Photomultiplier tube) and Thermal Transducers
(Thermocouple, Bolometer,Pyroelectric transducer). Colorimeters. Block
diagram of Single Beam and Double Beam Spectrophotometer. Infrared
Spectroscopy: IR Sources and detectors, Types of IR spectrophotometers,
FT-IR Spectrometer, Dispersive Spectrometry using monochromators.
Section B
Spectroscopic Analysis: Mass Spectrometers, X-Ray Spectrometer, Photo-
Acoustic Spectroscopy, Flame Spectrometer, NMR Spectrometer.
194

Liquid Analysis: pH meter, Conductivity meter, dissolved oxygen analysis,

Polarography- Apparatus, Circuits techniques-pulse polarography and
applications, Electrodes-Ion Selective, Molecular selective types-their
variations and application.
Gas Analysis: Paramagnetic Oxygen Analyzer, Thermal Conductivity
Analyzer, Infrared Gas Analyzer, Chemiluminescene Analyzer.
Section C
Chromatography: Basic parts of Gas Chromatography, Types of Columns,
Detection Systems: thermal conductivity. Flame ionization, Electron
capture detector. Liquid Chromatography: Types of Liquid chromatography
(Paper and Thin Layer). Types of columns and detection systems of Liquid
Chromatography.
Environmental Pollution Monitoring: Air pollutants, Air pollution
monitoring instruments-carbonmonoxide, sulphur dioxide, nitrogen oxide,
hydrocarbon and ozone. Smoke monitor, Dust monitor, visible emission
monitoring system.
Text Books:
1. R.K. Jain, “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna
Publications
2. R.S.Khandpur, “Handbook of Analytical Instruments”, TMH New
Delhi.
3. D.A. Skoog, “Principles of Instrumental Analysis”, Saunders College
Publishing, Philadalphia.
Reference Books:
1. H. H. Williard, L. LMeritt, J.A.Dean and F.A.Settle, “Instrumental
Methods of Analysis”, CBS Publishers, Delhi.
2. D. Patranabis, “Prinicples of Industrial Instrumentation”, TMH, New
Delhi.
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103108100/15
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103108100/
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/biological-engineering/20-309-biological-
engineering-ii-instrumentation-and-measurement-fall-2006/
195

EIE 413 Fiber Optic and Laser Instrumentation

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To recognize and classify the structures of Optical fiber and types.
• To discuss the channel impairments like losses and dispersion.
• To analyze various coupling losses.
• To classify the Optical sources and detectors and to discuss their
principle.
• Tofamiliar with Design considerations of fiber optic systems.
• To perform characteristics of optical fiber, sources and detectors,
design as well as conduct experiments in software and hardware,
analyze the results to provide valid conclusions.
Section A
Fiber optical waveguides, different types of fibers and their properties,
Dispersion, losses optical fiber connectors, measurement of fiber
characteristics: attenuation, dispersion’ refractive index profile, optical time
___domain reflectometer. Light emitting diode: radiative recombination, LED
materials, constructions & response time. Junction detectors: p-n and p-i-n
photodiode, response times, APD.
Section B
LASER: Emission and absorption of radiation, Einstein relation,
Absorption of radiation, Population inversion, Optical feedback, Threshold
conditions, line shape functions, laser modes, Class of lasers:, solid state,
semiconductors, gas & liquid laser. Single’mode operation, Q-switching &
mode locking. Laser for measurement of distance and velocity.
Section C
Fibre optic sensors: measurement of length, displacement, pressure,
temperature, current voltage, liquid level, fiber optic gyroscope.
Holography: basic principle and applications, Laser in material processing:
interaction of high-power laser beams with materials, laser welding, cutting,
hole drilling and trimming of materials.
196

Text Books:
1. Wilson & Hawkes: Opto Electronics, an introduction. III edition, PHI
Publication
2. James T. Luxon, David E. Parker, Industrial lasers and their
applications, Prentice- Hall International.
Reference Books:
1. John M. Senior: Optical Fiber Communication, III edition, PHI
Publication.
2. John F Read, Industrial applications of lasers, Academic Press, 1978.
e-Resources:
1. https://swayam.gov.in/course/3545-fiber-optics
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/115107095/
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-005-understanding-lasers-and-
fiberoptics-spring-2008/fiberoptics-fundamentals/

EIE 301 Biomedical Instrumentation

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To describe the origin of biopotentials and explain the role of
biopotential electrodes;
• To inspect common biomedical signals and distinguish characteristic
features;
• To identify common signal artifacts, their sources and formulate
strategies for their suppression;
• To outline the design of cardiac pacemakers, neurostimulators and
defibrillators;
• To explain and contrast measurement principles for blood flow, pressue
and volume as well as respiratory variables
197

• To define and discuss biochemical sensors; andIdentify, explain and

judge patient safety issues related to biomedical instrumentation.
Section A
Electrode electrolyte interface, hall-cell potential, polarization and non-
polarisable electrode electrode-metal micropipette Ag-Cl electrodes
Microelectrodes, skin surface electrode, and lead for EG, ECG EMG
Transducer for biomedical applications, factors governing the selection of
transducer pressure temperature, flow, biomedical ultrasonic transducer.
Section B
Noise preamplifier, main amplifier and driver amplifier, inkjet recorder
thermal array recorder, photographic recorder, magnetic tape recorder, X-Y
recorder, medical oscilloscope pH, PO, PCO2, PHCO3, Electrophoresis
colorimeter, spectrophotometer, flame photometer, auto analyzer.
Section C
Respiration, heart rate, temperature, pulse blood pressure, cardiac output
02, CO2 measurements. Measurement of blood pressure, blood flow, and
heart sound, cardiograph: Phonocardiography, vector cardiography,
Echocardiography pacemaker. Defibrillators, Ventilator, Computer patient
monitoring system.
Text Book:
1. Cromwell. L. (2015). Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement
(2nd ed.). New Delhi: Pearson Education India.
Reference books:
1. Webster, J. G. (2015). Medical Instrumentation Application and
Design (4th ed.). New York: John Wiley and sons.
2. Khandpur, R.S. (2014). Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation (3rd
ed.). New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.
3. Carr, J. J. & Brown, J. M. (2002). Introduction to Biomedical
equipment Technology(4th ed.). New York: John Wiley and sons.
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105101/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117108037/15
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/materials-science-and-engineering/3-051j-
materials-for-biomedical-applications-spring-2006/
198

4. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/health-sciences-and-technology/hst-590-
biomedical-engineering-seminar-series-developing-professional-skills-
fall-2006/

EIE 306 Virtual Instrumentation

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To recognize the components of virtual instrumentations and apply
them for PC based measurement.
• To understand the basics of interfacing of VI and get an adequate
knowledge of virtual instrumentation.
• To write VI programs for different applications and employ LabVIEW
software for control, measurement and data acquisition.
• To understand the common instrument interfaces with their industrial
specification and standards.
• To interface the supporting hardware of VI with LabVIEW and
develop computer based control system.
Section A
Virtual Instrumentation: Historical perspectives, advantages, block diagram
and architecture of a virtual instrument, data-flow techniques, graphical
programming in data flow, and comparison with conventional
programming. Development of Virtual Instrument using GUI, Real-time
systems. Embedded Controller, OPC, HMI / SCADA software, Active X
programming.
VI programming techniques: VIS and sub-VIS, loops and charts, arrays,
clusters and graphs, case and sequence structures, formula nodes, local and
global variables, string and file I/O, Instrument Drivers, Publishing
measurement data in the web.
199

Section B
Data acquisition basics: Introduction to data acquisition on PC, Sampling
fundamentals, Input/ Output techniques and buses. ADC, DAC, Digital I/O,
counters and timers, DMA, Software and hardware installation, Calibration,
Resolution, Data acquisition interface requirements.
VI Chassis requirements. Common Instrument Interfaces: Current loop RS
232C/ RS485, GPIB.
Section C
Bus Interfaces: USB, PCMCIA, VXI, SCSI, PCI, PXI, Firewire. PXI
system controllers, Ethernet control of PXI.
Networking basics for office & Industrial applications, VISA and IVI.
VI toolsets. Distributed I/O modules. Application of Virtual
Instrumentation: Instrument Control, Development of process database
management system.
Simulation of systems using VI, Development of Control system. Industrial
Communication, Image acquisition and processing. Motion control.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gary Johnsongv, Lab VIEW Graphical Programming, 2nd edition,
McGraw Hill, Newyork, 1997.
2. Lisa K. wells & Jeffrey Travis, Lab VIEW for everyone, Prentice Hall,
New Jersey, 1997.
REFERENCES:
1. Kevin James, PC Interfacing and Data Acquisition: Techniques for
Measurement, Instrumentation and Control, Newnes, 2000.
e-Resources:
1. http://www.ni.com/en-in/innovations/white-papers/06/virtual-
instrumentation.html
2. http://www.ni.com/training/labview/
200

EIE 417 Power Plant Engineering

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To understand the basics related to Power Plants.
• To differentiate types of Power Plants.
• To describe the different components related to Power Plants.
• To understand the working of Steam, Diesel, Gas, and Nuclear power
plants.
• To know about Unconventional Methods of Power Generation.
Section A
Introduction: Introduction to generation of electrical power, sources of
energy, comparative merits, principal types of power plants.
Steam Power Plants: Selection of site, general layout of plant. Rankine
cycle with regeneration, reheat, intercooling. Condensers, spray ponds and
cooling towers, feed water treatment.
Hydro Electric Power Plants: Site selection, classification, different types of
hydroelectric power plants and their field of use. General layout of storage
type of plant. Prime movers, selection of turbine.
Section B
Diesel Power Plants: Fields of use, components of diesel electric power
plant, types of diesel engines used, performance of diesel electric power
plant, comparison with steam power plants.
Gas Turbine Power Plants: Components of gas turbine power plant, open
cycle and closed cycle plants with regeneration, reheat, intercooling. Choice
of working fluid, arrangement of plant components. Combined gas and
steam power plant. Comparison with diesel and steam power plants.
Section C
Nuclear power plants: selection of site, nuclear reaction, fission process and
chain reaction, constituents of power plant and layout, nuclear reactor,
working, classification, control, shielding and waste disposal.
201

Unconventional Methods of Power Generation: Introduction to solar energy

and its utilization, solar cells, thermo-electric and thermionic devices, fuel
cells, magneto hydrodynamic energy conversion, geothermal, tidal and
wind power plants.
Text Book:
1. Domkundwar, S. &Arora,S. C. (1996). A course in power
plantengineering. DhanpatRai& Sons, Delhi.
2. Nag,P.K. (2006). Power Plant Engineering. TMH.
Reference Books:
1. Skrotzki, (1966). Power Station Engineering &Economy.McGraw Hill
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105058/8
2. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/energy-courses/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107216/
4. https://www.coursera.org/lecture/thermodynamics-intro/07-01-
example-of-analysis-of-a-rankine-power-plant-part-1-assigning-the-
state-RKEsQ
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/121106014/

EEE 401 Electrical Drives and Control

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To understand definition, scope, objectives, and limitation of electric
drives, power transistor and SCR.
• To analyze the construction and characteristics and application of D.C.
motor.
• To analyze the construction and characteristics and application of three
phase induction motor .
• To analyze the speed control methods of A.C. and D.C. motor
202

• To analyze the construction and characteristics and application of

sensor, transducer and switches.
• To analyze the industrial applications of electric drives.
Section A
Fundamentals of Electric Drive: Construction, advantages and
classification, speed-torque conventions and multi-quadrant operations,
constant torque and constant power operation.
Types of load torque: Components, nature and classification, load
equalization.
Dynamics of electric Drive: Dynamics of motor-load combination, steady-
state and transient stability of electric Drive.
Selection of Motor Power rating: Thermal model of motor for heating and
cooling, classes of motor duty, determination of motor power rating for
continuous duty, short time duty and intermittent duty.
Section B
Electric Braking: Purpose and types, braking of DC motor, three phase
induction and synchronous motors. Dynamics during Starting and
Braking: Calculation of acceleration time and energy loss during starting
of dc shunt and three phase induction motors, methods of reducing energy
loss during starting, energy relations during braking, dynamics during
braking.
Power Electronic Control of DC Drives: Single phase and three phase
controlled converter fed separately excited dc motor drives (continuous
conduction only), dual converter fed separately excited dc motor drive,
rectifier control of dc series motor, supply harmonics, power factor and
ripples in motor current, chopper control of separately excited dc motor and
dc series motor.
Section C
Power Electronic Control of AC Drives: Three phase induction motor
drive, static voltage control scheme, static frequency control scheme (VSI,
CSI, and cyclo-converter based) static rotor resistance and slip power
recovery control schemes.
Three Phase Synchronous motor: Self-controlled scheme.
Special Drives: Switched reluctance motor, brushless dc motor, selection
of motor for particular applications.
203

Text Books:
1. Dubey, G.K. (2002). Fundamentals of Electric Drives (2nded.).Narosa
Publishing House.
2. Pillai, S.K. (2012). A First Course on Electric Drives (3rded.). New
Age International.
3. Bose, B. K.(2006). Power Electronics and Motor Drives
(1sted.).Academic Press.
Reference Books:
1. Chilkin, M. (2012). Electric Drives”. Mir Publishers, Moscow.
2. Mohammed A. E. (2008). Fundamentals of Electric Drives. Thomson
Asia, Pvt. Ltd. Singapore.
3. De N.K. and Prashant (2007) K.S. Electric Drives. Prentice Hall of
India Ltd.
4. Subrahmanyam, V. (2005) Electric Drives: Concepts and Applications.
Tata McGraw Hill.
E- Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102046/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108104011/
3. http://www.vssut.ac.in/lecture_notes/lecture1424084684.pdf
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108108077/

EEE 401L Electrical Drives and Control Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

• To analyze the construction and characteristics and application of three

phase induction motor.
• To analyze the speed control methods of A.C. and D.C. motor
• To analyze the construction and characteristics and application of
sensor, transducer and switches.
• To analyze the industrial applications of electric drives.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
l. Modeling and simulation of armature voltage control of DC drive.
2. Modeling and simulation of speed control of chopper fed DC drive.
3. Modeling and simulation of speed control of fully controlled rectifier
fed DC drive.
4. To obtain four quadrants operation of dual converter fed DC drive.
5. To control speed of DC drive through microcontroller.
6. To control speed of three phase Induction motor drive through
microcontroller.
7. To control speed of SRM drive through microcontroller.
8. To control speed of PMSM drive through microcontroller.

MCTR 402 Mechatronics

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To develop skills to monitor and control real world industrial systems
• To implement projects for industrial and home automations
• To analyze and create own innovative filters and signal conditioning
applications
• To perform computer based controlling of industries using PLC,
SCADA and HMI.
205

Section A
Mechatronics and its scope: Displacement, position & proximity,
Velocity, force, Pressure and level. Signal conditioning: amplification,
filtering, Elements of Microprocessors & Microcontrollers,
Programmable Logic controllers, Communication interface.
Section B
Pneumatic and Hydraulic actuation systems: Directional control valves.
Pressure control valves and cylinders. Process control valves
Mechanical actuation system: kinematic chains, cams, gear-trains, Ratchet
& Pawl, dampers, Bearings,
Electrical actuation system: Mechanical switches- solenoid operated solid
state switches, DC, AC & stepper motors. Building blocks of
Mechanical spring, mass and damper
Drives- Electrical Drives Fluid systems, hydraulic, servo Closed loop
controllers.
Section C
Case Studies of Mechatronic Systems: Industrial Robot and its control,
Automobile Engine Control, Electromechanical disc-control, Vehicle
Suspension Control, Micro Mechanical Systems, Computer Printer,
VCR, Fax Machine, NC Machine.
Text Books:
1. Rolf, I. (2005).Mechatronics Systems Fundamentals. Springer.
2. Bolten, W. (2003). Mechatronics. Pearson/Prentice Hall.
3. Sawhney, A. K. (2004).A Course in Electrical & Electronic
Measurements & Instrumentation. Dhanpat Rai & Company
Publication.
4. Nakra, B. C., Chaudhry, K.K. (2010). Instrumentation, Measurement
and Analysis. Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
E- Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_me31/preview
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-737-
mechatronics-fall-2014/
206

MCTR 402L Mechatronics Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To simulate the basic electric, hydraulic and pneumatic system using
simulation software.
• To develop an understanding of plc ladder diagram related to industrial
automation systems and measure its performance.
• To design Mechatronics system according to an Industrial
Applications.
• To combine the real time control systems with peripheral devices
through programmable interface techniques..
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of Modular Mechatronics System (MMS) and its components.
2. To design and assemble the components of distribution or feeding
station.
3. To design and assemble the components of testing station.
4. To design and assemble the components of sorting station.
5. To study different modes of operation of a six axis industrial robot.
6. To study about Selective Compliance Articulated Robotic Arm
(SCARA) station.
7. To study about IOT and RFID application in Mechatronics System.
8. To study and control different parameters in process automation.

MCTR 403 Robotics and Automation

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To develop skills of creating industrial and mobile robot projects
207

• To implement robots like KUKA, PUMA in real industrial world

• To create innovative robot designs using mathematical concepts of
kinematics
• To develop autonomous mobile robots in surveillance, security, home
and office services.
Section A
BASIC CONCEPTS-Automation and Robotics-An overview of Robotics,
Present and future applications - classification by coordinate system and
control system, Dynamic stabilization of Robotics.
POWER SOURCES AND SENSORS- Hydraulic, Pneumatic and electric
drivers-Determination HP of motor and gearing ratio, variable speed
arrangements, Path Determination-Machinery Vision- Ranging-Laser
acoustic, Magnetic Fiber Optic and Tactile Sensor.
Section B
MANIPULATORS- Construction of Manipulators, Manipulator Dynamic
and Force Control, Electronic and Pneumatic manipulators.
ACTUATORS AND GRIPPERS-Pneumatic, Hydraulic Actuators,
Stepper Motor Control Circuits, End Effector, Various types of Grippers,
Design consideration.
Differential transformation and manipulators, Jacobians-problems.
Dynamics: Lagrange-Euler and Newton-Euler formations - Problems.
Section C
KINEMATICS -Forward and Inverse Kinematic Problems, Solutions of
Inverse Kinematic problems, Multiple Solution, Jacobian Work Envelop-
Hill Climbing Techniques.
PATH PLANNING-Trajectory planning and avoidance of obstacles, path
programming, languages and software packages. planning, Skew motion,
joint integrated motion-straight line motion - Rol CASE STUDY- Multiple
Robots - Interface Robots in Manufacturing and Non-Manufacturing
applications- Robot Cell Design Selection of a Robot.
Text books:
1. Groover,M. P.(2017). Industrial Robotics: Technology, Programming,
and Applications (2nded.). Pearson Education.
2. Niku, S. B. (2011). Introduction to Robotics (2nded.). Wiley.
208

3. Fu, K.S., Lee,C.S. G. &Gonzalez, R. (1987) . Robotics:

Control,Sensing, vision and intelligence. Tata McGraw-Hill Education
4. Mittal, R.K.&Nagrath, I. J.(2018). Robotics and Control. Tata
McGraw-Hill Education.
References books:
1. Craig, J. J. (2008). Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control
(3rded.). Pearson Education.
2. Spong, M. W. &Vidyasagar, M. (2008). Robot Dynamics and Control.
John Wiley & Sons.
3. Siciliano , B. & Sciavicco, L. (2010). Robotics: Modelling, Planning
and Control. Springer.
E-Resources:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_me61/preview
2. https://swayam.gov.in/courses/4859-july-2018-robotics
3. https://www.edx.org/learn/robotics
4. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/robotics

MCTR 403L Robotics and Automation Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To develop skills of creating industrial and mobile robot projects
• To implement robots like KUKA, PUMA in real industrial world
• To create innovative robot designs using mathematical concepts of
kinematics
• To develop autonomous mobile robots in surveillance, security, home
and office services.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Implementation of D-H Parameters on Robo Analyzer software.
2. Implementation of Forward Kinematics on Robo Analyzer Software.
209

3. Implementation of Inverse Kinematics on Robo Analyzer Software.

4. Implementation and study of KUKA-Sim simulator/HMI Interface.
5. Implementation on Hardware (KR-16).
6. Implementation of Sensor Fusion on Robotino Software and hardware.
7. Implementation of Path Tracking on Robotino Software and hardware.
8. Study of TAL BRABO Robot with practical implementation.

EEE 409 Power System Operation and Control

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcome:
The Students will be able to:
• Understand the techniques to control power flows, frequency and
voltage.
• Explore the significance of voltage control.
• Understand the concept of flexible AC transmission and the associated
problems.
• Learn the power system security and its application as a system
operator.
Section A
Automatic Generation and Voltage Control: Introduction; Load
Frequency Control (Single Area Case); Load Frequency Control and
Economic Dispatch Control; Two-Area Load Frequency Control; Optimal
(Two-Area) Load Frequency Control; Automatic Voltage Control; Load
Frequency Control with Generation Rate Constraints (GRCs); Speed
Governor Dead-Band and Its Effect on AGC; Digital LF Controllers;
Decentralized Control.
Power System Security: Introduction; System State Classification; Security
Analysis; Contingency Analysis.
Section B
Reactive Power and Voltage Control: Introduction; Reactive power
requirement of an uncompensated line; Implication of surge impedance
210

loading; Reactive loss characteristics of transmission line; Operation of a

transmission line at no load condition; Operation of a transmission line
under heavy loading condition; Voltage regulation of the transmission line
and its relation with reactive power; Maximum power transfer in an
uncompensated line; Line loadability.
Section C
FACTS: The concept of flexible AC transmission - reactive power control
in electrical power transmission lines -uncompensated transmission line –
series and shunt compensation. Overview of FACTS devices - Static VAR
Compensator (SVC) – Thyristor Switched Series capacitor (TCSC) –
Unified Power Flow controller (UPFC) - Integrated Power Flow Controller
(IPFC)
Recommended Text Books
1. Grainger, J. J., Stevenson, W. D. (2017), “Power System Analysis” (1st
Edn.) McGraw Hill, USA.
2. Kothari, D. P., Nagrath, I. J. (2003), “Modern Power System
Analysis”(3rdEdn.) McGraw Hill
3. Chakrabarti, A.,Kothari, D. P., Mukhopadhyay, A. K., De, A.(2010),
“An introduction to Reactive Power Control and Voltage Stability in
Power Transmission Systems” , PHI
4. Venkatesh, P., Manikandan, B. V., Raja, S. C., Srinivasan, A.
(2012),“Electrical Power Systems”, PHI
Recommended Reference Books
1. Wood, A. J.,Woolenberg, B. F., (2014), “Power Generation Operation
and Control”, John Wiley and Sons
2. Saadat, H. (2002), “Power System Analysis”, (2nd Edn.) McGraw Hill
3. Singh, L. P., (2012) “Advanced Power System Analysis and Dynamics”
(2nd Edn. ), New Age International
Recommended e-Resources
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101040/
2. http://www.electrical-engineering-portal.com/
3. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php
4. www.vlab.co.in
211

EEE 409L Power System Operation and Control Lab

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcome:
The Students will be able to:
• Understand the techniques to obtain transmission line parameters.
• Explore the significance of voltage control.
• Perform the study of frequency control.
• Learn the economic load dispatch optimization from the perspective of
system operator.
List of Experiments
1. Measurement of ABCD parameter of Transmission Line using
MATLAB.
2. Modelling Single Area and Multi Line Load Frequency control using
MATLAB Simulink.
3. Calculate the inductance and capacitance of different type of
transmission line configuration
4. Calculation of Vs, Vr, line losses and power factor of short
transmission line.
5. Calculation of Vs, Vr, line losses and power factor of medium
transmission line.
6. To solve swing equation by point by point method
7. To solve the economic load dispatch problem
212

EEE 410 Power System Restructuring and Deregulation

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcome:
The Students will be able to:
• Familiarize with concepts and need for deregulated power systems.
• Solve market based power flow and unit commitment problems.
• Understand power market development in India and across the world.
Section A
Traditional Power Industry: structure, motivations for restructuring,
restructuring process, Market Model: monopoly model, purchasing agency
model, wholesale competition model, retail competition model. Comparison
of market models, Electricity Vs other commodities, Components of
restructured systems, Key Market Entities- ISO, TSO, GENCO,
TRANSCO, DISCO, RETAILCO, Functions and responsibilities, Trading
arrangements: pool, bilateral & multilateral, Open Access Transmission
Systems & Distribution Systems.
Fundamentals of Deregulation: Need and conditions for deregulation,
Components of Deregulation, Technical, economic & regulatory issues
involved in deregulation of power industry. Privatization, Competition in
the electricity sector, conditions, barriers, different types, benefits and
challenges, Reregulation.
Basics of Public Good Economics: consumer behaviour, supplier
behaviour, market equilibrium, short-run and long-run costs, different cost
of production and perfectly competitive market.
Section B
Power system Operation in Restructured Markets: Coordinated real
time dispatch through balancing mechanism, Imbalance settlement
methodologies. Transmission Congestion Management: methodologies,
Nodal pricing. Available Transfer Capability Evaluation and
Methodologies.
Electricity Markets Pricing: Market Clearing price, Zonal and locational
market clearing price, Locational Marginal Prices (LMP), LMP formulation
213

and Implementation, LMP using AC optimal power flow, LMP using DC

optimal power flow, Price based unit commitment and power flow.
Section C
Ancillary Services: Classifications and definitions, Market for ancillary
services, load generation balancing related services, voltage control and
reactive power support services, black start capability service, co-
optimization of energy and reserve services.
Power market development in India: Institutional structure in Indian
Power sector, generation, transmission and distribution utilities.
Availability based tariff, electricity act 2003, open access, Power
Exchanges.
Recommended Text Books
1. Shahidehpour, M., Yamin, H., & Li, Z. (2003). Market operations in
electric power systems: forecasting, scheduling, and risk management.
John Wiley & Sons.
2. Kirschen, D. S., & Strbac, G. (2018). Fundamentals of power system
economics. John Wiley & Sons.
3. Bhattacharya, K., Bollen, M. H., & Daalder, J. E. (2012). Operation of
restructured power systems. Springer Science & Business Media.
4. Lai, L. L. (Ed.). (2001). Power system restructuring and deregulation:
trading, performance and information technology. John Wiley & Sons.
Recommended Reference Books
1. Stoft, S. (2002). Power system economics: designing markets for
electricity”, Wiley Interscience.
2. Gilbert, R. J., & Kahn, E. P. (Eds.). (2007). International comparisons
of electricity regulation. Cambridge University Press.
3. Rothwell G, Gomez T. (Eds.) (2003). Electricity Economics Regulation
and Deregulation. IEEE Press Power Engineering Series, John Wiley
& Sons.
Recommended e-Resources
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101005/65#
2. http://edu.epfl.ch/coursebook/en/power-system-restructuring-and-
deregulation-EE-570
3. https://www.e-education.psu.edu/eme801/node/534
214

EEE 410L Power System Restructuring and

Deregulation Lab
Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 0 0 2 1

Learning Outcome:
The Students will be able to:
• Understand different commercial software tools used for power system
studies.
• Solve different problems related to power system operation.
• Understand congestion management in power system.
List of Experiments
1. Formulate and solve price based unit commitment problem.
2. Modeling of DC optimal power flow problem in power system
software.
3. Modeling of AC optimal power flow problem in power system
software.
4. Calculation of locational and zonal marginal prices using different
methods.
5. Calculation of Available Transfer Capability for a given power system.
6. Modeling of congestion management methods in power system
software.
7. Modeling and simulation of co-optimization of energy and reserve
services.

MCTR 420 Operation Research

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To understand the basics of Linear Programming.
215

• To describe the different types of Inventory Models.

• To understand the Transportation and Assignment problem and
application.
• To know about Game Theory problem and application.
Section A
Introduction: Characteristics and scope of O.R., formulations of problem
and methodology.
Linear Programming: Mathematical formulation of problem, graphical
solution. Simplex and revised simplex methods, unrestricted and bounded
variables, degeneracy and cycling, perturbation methods. Duality.
Sensitivity analysis.
Section B
Transportation and Assignment: LP formulation; Transportation algorithm;
Hungarian algorithm.
Game Theory: Pure and mixedstrategies; Graphical solution; Dominance;
LP formulation.
Sectionc
Inventory Models: Elements of costs, lead time, inventory control
techniques, ABC analysis. Economic lot size problems with deterministic
demand and supply rate including considerations of shortages and price
breaks. Buffer stock, reorder level and reorder point. Economic run length.
Text Book:-
1. Taha,H.A. Operations Research- An Introduction. PHI.
2. Khanna,O. P.(2018).Industrial Engineering and Management. Dhanpat
Rai Publications
Reference Book:-
1. Swarup, K. Gupta,P. K. &Mohanm, M. Operations Research. Sultan
Chand & Sons.
2. Hiller &Liberman. Introduction to Operations Research. San
Francisco, Holden Day Inc.
e-Resources:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112106134/
2. https://www.coursera.org/learn/wharton-operations
216

3. https://swayam.gov.in/courses/5746-operation-research
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112106131/

MCTR 413 Industrial Engineering

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To understand the basics of Management and Management structure.
• To interpret about Production Planning and Control, Work Study.
• To differentiate types of cost.
• To describe the different type of Plant Layout.
• To understand the Material Handling.
• To know about network techniques, CPM and PERT, time estimates.
Section A
Introduction: Historical development, functional areas of business and the
need for integrating these through the development of business goals.
Management: Principles and elements of management. Functions of
management, planning, organization, staffing, directing, coordination and
control. Types and levels of management, management structure. Scientific
management, development of management thought with reference to the
work of Taylor, Gilberth, Mayo and Kurt Lewin.
Elements of costing and financial statements: Classification of costs, direct
and indirect cost, labour, material and over-head, Prime cost, factory cost,
fixed cost, variable cost, increment cost, Allocation of overhead costs.
Analysis of Break even chart.
Section B
Plant Layout: Principles of plant layout, use of travel charts. Flow Pattern,
Process Layout and Product Layout and combination, Line balancing.
Materials Handling: Functions, engineering and economic factors,
relationship to plant layout. Selection, operation and maintenance of
material handling equipment. Types of equipment
217

Production Planning and Control: Types of production, Function of

production planning and control, planning. Pre-planning, sales forecasting,
routing, scheduling, dispatching and control, Gantt charts.
Section C
Work Study: Concept of productivity, method study, motion economy,
process chart symbols. Flow diagram, operation analysis and operation
chart, SIMO charts. Work measurement, use of stop watch procedure for
time study data. Use of time study data with practical applications.
Performance rating.
Introduction to network techniques, CPM and PERT, time estimates.
Text Book:-
1. Mahajan, M. Industrial Engineering and Production Management.
Dhanpat Rai & Sons. Delhi.
2. Banga& Sharma. Engineering Economics and Industrial Organization.
Khanna Publishers.
Reference Book:-
1. Philippo. Principles of Personnel Management. McGraw Hill.
2. Buffa. (2007). Operations management. Wiley.
e-Resources:-
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107142/
2. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/supply-chain-management
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107143/
4. https://www.edx.org/micromasters/principles-manufacturing

MCTR 417 Manufacturing Science

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To understand the Metal Cutting and force analysis in the operation.
• To interpret about Hot and Cold working.
218

• To differentiate among the Modern Machining Methods.

• To describe the different Bulk Deformation Processes.
• To know about Production of Machine Components.
Section A
Metal Cutting: Machining operations – types, elements and cutting
conditions; Theory of chip formation and chip flow – shear
angle;Orthogonal and Oblique cutting; Geometry and designation of single
point cutting tool, milling cutters, twist drill, broaches; Form tools.
Merchant’s Force Analysis: Forces, Stresses and Power consumption in
orthogonal cutting; Velocities, Strain (rate), Specific cutting energy.
Section B
Metal Working: Metal behavior in metal forming – Principal stresses and
strains, Plastic deformation and Yielding criteria; Hot and Cold working.
Bulk Deformation Processes: Forging – Open and Closed die, Impression,
Drop, Upset and Press forging; rolling. Extrusion – Forward, Backward and
Impact extrusion; Wire, Rod and Tube drawing. Sheet Metal Working:
Cutting –Shearing, Blanking, Punching; Drawing; Bending; Spinning.
Section C
Modern Machining Methods: Classification; Abrasive and Water jet;
Ultrasonic; Electrochemical; Chemical milling; Electricdischarge; Plasma
arc machining.
Production of Machine Components: Processes of producing Shafts;
Threads – Chasing, Rolling, Dies and Taps, Milling, Grinding;Gears –
Casting, Stamping, Rolling, Milling, Shaping, Hobbing, Shaving, Grinding.
Text Book:-
1. Kalpakjian,Serope&Schmid,Steven.(2013) Manufacturing Engineering
& Technology (7th ed.). Pearson
2. Sharma, P.C. (1999).A Textbook of Production Engineering (8th
Revised edition) S Chand.
Reference Book:-
1. Pandey & Shan. Modern machining Process. TMH.
2. Ghosh, A. & Mallik, A. K. (2010). Manufacturing Science. India,
PEARSON
e-Resources:-
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107145/
219

2. https://nptel.ac.in/downloads/112105127/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-
ROORKEE/MANUFACTURING-PROCESSES/index.htm
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107145/
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105127/

MCTR 422 Production Technology

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes
The Students will be able to:
• To understand the foundation and design of gate riser system.
• To differentiate among types of Welding and related methods.
• To understand the working of Lathe, Shaper and drilling machine.
• To describe the different operation performed on Lathe, Shaper and
Drilling machine.
Section A
Foundry: Classification of casting processes. Pattern types, materials,
methods of construction and allowances. Core prints and core boxes.
Moulding materials. Types and properties of moulding sands, sand
additives, sand preparation.
Design principles of gating and risering systems, different types of gates
and risers, riser ___location. Casting defects.
Section B
Welding: Classification of welding processes, metallurgy of weld.
Oxyacetylene gas welding, equipment and tools used, types of flames, types
of joint, various position welding. Other arc welding methods like carbon
arc, metal inert gas (MIG), tungsten inert gas (TIG), atomic hydrogen,
plasma, submerged, flux-cored, and electro slag arc welding.
Other welding and related methods: Resistance welding, Thermit welding,
pressure welding, solid state welding methods. Brazing and soldering.
220

Section C
Lathes: Classification. Constructional details of centre lathe and its
principal parts, accessories, attachments, and work holding devices. Main
operations including taper turning and thread cutting.
Shaper: Classification. Constructional details and principal parts of standard
shaper, quick return and feed mechanisms.
Drilling Machines: Classification. Constructional details of sensitive, pillar
and radial drilling machines. Work and tool holding devices. Main
operations.
Milling Machines: Types and classification. Constructional details and
principle of operation of horizontal, vertical, and universal milling
machines.
Text Book:-
1. Kalpakjian,Serope&Schmid,Steven.(2013) Manufacturing Engineering
& Technology (7th ed.). Pearson
2. Sharma, P.C. (1999).A Textbook of Production Engineering (8th
Revised edition) S Chand.
Reference Book:-
1. Pandey & Shan. Modern machining Process. TMH.
2. Ghosh, A. & Mallik, A. K. (2010). Manufacturing Science. India,
PEARSON
e-Resources:-
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-
ROORKEE/MANUFACTURING-PROCESSES/index.htm
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104195/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107144/
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105127/
221

ECE 408 Analytical Instrumentation

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Explain majorly pH conductivity & dissolved component analyzer,
dissolved oxygen analyzer, sodium analyzer, silica analyzer and
moisture measurement.
• Evaluate the performance of Spectro-photometers, FTIR Spectrometers
and their applications.
• Describe modern trends in NMR Spectrometers, X-ray Spectrometry,
and Mass Spectrophotometers with their applications.
Section A
PH conductivity & dissolved component analyzer Sampling systems – ion
selective electrodes – conductivity meters – pH meters - dissolved oxygen
analyzer – sodium analyzer – silica analyzer – moisture measurement.
GAS ANALYSER Oxygen analyzer – CO monitor, CO2, O2, dust and
smoke measurement, thermal conductivity type–thermal analyzer–industrial
analyzers.
Section B
Spectro photometers: Spectral methods of analysis – Beer’s law UV –
visible spectrophotometers – single beam and double beam instruments –
source and detectors – IR spectrophotometers – sources and detectors –
FTIR spectrometers – atomic absorption spectrophotometer – flame
emission spectrophotometers – sources of flame photometry – applications.
Section C
Nuclear magnetic resolance and radiation techniques
NMR – basic principle – NMR spectrometers – applications – introduction
to mass spectrophotometers – nuclear radiation detectors – GM counter –
proportional counter – solid state detectors, X-ray spectrometry:
Instrumentation for X-ray spectrometry, X-ray diffractometer.
222

Recommended Books:
1. Willard., Merritt.Dean,& Settle. (2004). Instrumental Methods of
Analysis. New Delhi: CBS Publishers & Distributors.
2. Ewing, Galen.W. (1985). Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis.
New Delhi: McGraw-Hill Publication.
3. Liptak, B.G. (1995). Process Measurement and Analysis. Philadelphia:
Chilton Book Company.
4. Settle,Frank.A. (1997). Handbook of Instrumental Techniques for
Analytical Chemistry. New Delhi: PHI Publication.
5. Braun, Robert.D. (2012). Introduction to Instrumental Analysis.
Hyderabad, Karnataka:BSP Books Pvt.Ltd.
6. Skoog. Holler.,&Crouch. (2017). Principles of Instrumental Analysis.
New Delhi: Cengage Learning Publication.
Suggested e-resources:
1. Modern Instrumental Methods of Analysis by Prof. J. R. Mudakavi,
Department of Chemical Engineering, Indian Institute of Science,
Bangalore. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103108100/

ECE 404 Optical Network

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Describe the important components such as multiplexer, filters.
• Explain the multiplexing technique
• Explain the signalling and routing of WDM network elements
• Describe the protection technique in SONET/SDH and IP network
Section A
Introduction to Optical Networks, Characteristics of Optical Fiber
(Emphasis on Non Linear Characteristics) Timing & Synchronization,
Components: Couplers, Isolators & Circulators, Multiplexers & Filters,
Optical Amplifiers, Tunable Lasers, Switches, Wavelength Converters,
223

Networks SONET/SDH, Multiplexing, SONET/ SDH Layers, Frame,

Structure, Frame Structure, Physical Layer, Elements of a SONET/SDH
Infrastructure
Section B
ATM : Functions of ATM, Adaptation Layers, Quality of Service, Flow
Control, Signaling and Routing, WDM Network Elements, Optical Line
Terminals, Optical Line Amplifiers,
Optical Add/ Drop Multiplexers, Optical Cross Connects, WDM Network
Design, Cost Trade-offs, Light path Topology Design, and Routing and
wavelength assignment problems, Dimensioning Wavelength Routing
Networks,
Section C
Network Survivability Basic Concepts, Protection in SONET/SDH,
Protection in IP networks, Optical Layer Protection, Different Schemes,
Interworking between Layers
Access Networks, Network Architecture Overview, Enhanced HFC, FTTC,
Optical Switching, OTDM, Synchronization, Header Processing, Buffering,
Burst Switching. Deployment Considerations
Recommended Books:
1. Ramaswami, Rajiv.,& Sivarajan, Kumar. N.(2009). Optical Networks:
A Practical Perspective. San Francisco, California: Morgan Kaufmann
Publisher.
2. Uyless, Black. (2009). Optical Networks Third Generation Transport
Systems: New Delhi: Pearson Publication.
3. Tanenbaum, Andrew. S. (2010). Computer Networks. New Delhi:
Pearson Publication.
4. Murthy, C. Siva Ram.,&Gurusamy Mohan. (2001). WDM, Optical
Networks Concepts, Design & Algorithms. New Delhi: Pearson
Publication.
Suggested e-resources:
1. Introduction to Optical Networks by Yatindra Nath Singh,
Department of Electrical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology,
Kanpur. http://home.iitk.ac.in/~ynsingh/seminars/OptNets.pdf
224

2. Optical Networks and Switching Systems by Prof. Yatindra N Singh,

Department of Electrical Engineering Indian Institute of Technology,
Kanpur. https://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/117104021

ECE 406 Satellite Communication

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Identify the fundamentals of orbital mechanics, the characteristics of
common orbits used by communications and other satellites.
• Understand the systems required by a communications satellite to
function and the trade-offs and limitations encountered in the design of
a communications satellite system.
• Understand the radio propagation channel for Earth station to satellite
and satellite to satellite communications links, and the basics of
designing antenna systems to accommodate the needs of a particular
satellite system.
• Understand how analog and digital technologies are used for satellite
communications networks and the topologies and applications of those
networks, as well as the comparison to alternative communications
systems.
Section A
Elements of Satellite Communication, Orbital mechanics, look angle and
orbit determination, launches & launch vehicle, orbital effects,
Geostationary Orbit, Satellite subsystems, attitude and orbit control
systems, TTC&M, communication subsystem, satellite antenna, satellite
link design: basic transmission theory, system noise temperature and G/T
ratio, downlink design, uplink design, satellite systems using small earth
station, design for specified C/N.
Section B
Modulation and multiplexing techniques for satellite links: FM, pre-
emphasis and de-emphasis, S/N ratios for FM video transmission, digital
225

transmission, digital modulation and demodulation, TDM.Multiple access:

FDMA, TDMA, DAMA and CDMA.
Section C
Error control for digital satellite links: error detection and correction,
channel capacity, error control coding, convolutional codes, linear and
cyclic block codes. Propagation effects and their impact on satellite-earth
links: attenuation and depolarization, atmospheric absorption, rain, cloud
and ice effects etc. Introduction of various satellite systems: VSAT, low
earth orbit and non-geostationary, direct broadcast satellite television and
radio, satellite navigation and the global positioning systems.
Recommended Books:
1. Bostian, Charles.,Pratt, Timothy., & Allnutt, Jeremy. (2006). Satellite
Communications. New Delhi: John Wiley & Sons.
2. Maral G., Bousquet M., Sun Z. (2010) Satellite Communications
Systems : Systems, techniques and technology, 5th edition, , John Willy
and sons.
3. Roddy, Dennis. (2017). Satellite Communications. New
Delhi:McGraw-Hill Publication
4. Ha, Tri. T. (1990). Digital Satellite Communications. New Delhi:
McGraw-Hill Publication
Suggested e-resources:
1. Satellite Communication Systems by Prof. Kalyan Kumar
Bandyopadhyay Department of Electronics and Electrical
Communication Engineering Indian Institute of Technology,
Kharagpur. http://textofvideo.nptel.ac.in/117105131/lec1.pdf
2. Satellite Link Design by Dr. Marwah Ahmed.
https://net425site.files.wordpress.com/2017/02/net-425-d-feb-2016-lec-
5.pdf
226

ELE 403 Basics of Nanoelectronics

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Explain the fundamental science and quantum mechanics behind
nanoelectronics.
• Explain the basic concepts behind the operation of nano scale
MOSFET
• Describe the various techniques and approaches for the fabrication of
nano-scale devices
Section A
The ‘Top down’ and ‘Bottom up’ approach, Nanotechnology potential,
introductory quantum mechanics for Nanoscience: size effect in smaller
systems, quantum behavior of nanometric world, Band structure and density
of states at Nanoscale: energy bands, density of states at low dimensional
structure. Semiconductor heterostructure quantum wells, quantum wires,
and quantum dots.
Section B
MOS band structure, CMOS Scaling, The nanoscale MOSFET, Finfets,
Vertical MOSFETs, limits to scaling, Tunnel junction and application of
tunneling: Tunneling through a potential barrier, potential energy profiles of
material interfaces, Classical and semi-classical transport, ballistic
transport, carbon nanotubes, Single electron transistor, Coulomb Blockade,
Resonant Tunneling diodes and transistors.
Section C
Buck minsterfullerence, Nanodiomond, Molecular Machine,
Nanobiometrics. Fabrication technology: Top-down vs. bottom-up
technology. Lithographic process: Lithography, Nanolithography, split
gate technology, self-assembly, limitation of lithographic process. Non-
lithographic techniques: Plasma arc discharge, sputtering, evaporation,
chemical vapour deposition, pulsed laser deposition, molecular beam
epitaxy, sol-gel technique, electro deposition and other process.
227

Recommended Books:
1. Hanson, G. W. (2008). Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics. New Delhi:
Pearson Publication.
2. Chattopadhyay, K. K., & Banerjee, A. N. (2009). Introduction to
Nanoscience and Nanotechnology. New Delhi: PHI Publication.
3. Mitin, Vlaadiniz.U. (2009). Introduction to Nanoelectronics. New
Delhi: Cambridge University Press.
4. Dragman,M., &Dragman,D. (2008). Nanoelectronics- Principles and
Devices (2/e): Artech House Publishers
5. Goser, Karl. (2004). Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems. Berlin:
Springer Publication
6. Minoli, Daniel. (2005). Nanotechnology Application
toTelecommunication and Networking. Hoboken, New Jersey: Wiley
Publication.
7. Davis ,John. H. (1997). Physics of Low Dimension Semiconductor. New Delhi:
Cambridge University Press.
8. Cosh, Carl.C. (1998). Nanostructure Materials Processing Property and Applications.
Norwich, New York: Noyes Publications

ECE 403 Mobile Communication

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• To understand the various generations of mobile communications and
basics of wireless communication
• To understand the concept of cellular communication
• Can test mobile communication equipment for the technical
functionality
• Knowledge of GSM mobile communication standard, its architecture,
logical channels, advantages and limitations
228

Section A
Introduction to Wireless Communication System: Evolution of mobile radio
communication, Mobile radiotelephony in U.S Mobile radio system around
the world, second generation (2G) cellular network, evolution to 2 5G
wireless network evolution for 2.5G TDMA standards, third generation
(3G) wireless network. The Cellular concept- System design fundamentals,
frequency reuse channel, assignment strategies. Hand off strategies
Interference and system capacity, improving coverage and capacity in
cellular system.
Section B
Propagation model and Spread Spectrum Modulation Techniques: Longley
rice model, kumara model hata model pcs extension to hata model, wolfish
and betony model, Pseudo Noise (PN) sequence,. Direct sequence spread
spectrum (DSSS), frequency hopped spread spectrum (FHSS). Multiple
Access Techniques for Wireless Communication, Introduction to multiple
access. Frequency division multiple access (FDMA) Time division Multiple
access (TDMA).
Section C
Spread spectrum multiple access. Packet Radio. Global System for Mobile
Communication, channel types, Example of a GSM cell. Frame structure of
GSM, Data over low power wireless Re-cordless Network.
Recommended Books:
1. Rappaport, Theodre. S. (2014) Wireless Communication. New Delhi:
Pearson Publication.
2. Pandya, Raj. (1999). Mobile and Personal Communication System and
Services: New Delhi: PHI Publication.
3. Goddman, David.J. (1997). Wireless Personal Communication
System:Addition Wesley Publication.
4. Tesal, Joachim. (1997). GSM cellular Radio: New Delhi: John Wiley
Publication
Suggested E-Resources:
1. Wireless Communications by Prof. Dr.Ranjan Bose, Department of
Electrical Engineering, IIT Delhi.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117102062/
229

ECE 405 Radar Navigation

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Understand the basic concept of Radar and applications of various
types.
• Understand the different Radar Performance factors.
• Explain the operation of CW& FM Radar.
• Understand the Satellite navigation system.
Section A
RADAR SIGNAL MODELS: Amplitude models, distributed target forms
of range equation, radar cross section, statistical description of radar cross
section, Swerling model, Clutter, signal to clutter ratio, temporal and spatial
correlation of clutter, noise model and signal to noise ratio, frequency
models, Doppler shift, simplifies approach to Doppler shift, stop and hop
assumption, spatial model, variation with angle, variation with range,
projections, multipath, spectral models.
RADAR WAVE FORMS: Waveform matched filter of moving targets,
ambiguity function, ambiguity function of the simple matched pulse filter
for the pulse burst, pulse by pulse processing, range ambiguity, Doppler
response and ambiguity function of the pulse burst.
Section B
DETECTION FUNDAMENTALS: Radar detection as hypothesis testing,
Neyman-Pearson detection rule, likelihood ratio test, threshold detection of
radar signals, non-coherent integration of nonfluctuating targets,
Albersheim and Shnidaman equations, Binary integration.
RADIO DIRECTION FINDING: loop direction finder, goniometer, errors
in direction finding, adcock and automatic direction finders, commutated
aerial direction finder. RADIO RANGES: LF/MF four course radio ranges,
VOR, ground equipment & receiver, VOR errors.
HYBERBOLIC SYSTEM OF NAVIGATION: LORAN Decca & Omega
system.DME & TECAN.
230

Section C
Aids to approach and landing: ILS, GCA & MLS
Doppler navigation: beam configuration, doppler frequency equation, track
stabilisation and doppler spectrum, components of doppler navigation
system, doppler radar equipment, CW & FMCW doppler radar, frequency
trackers, doppler range equation.
Satallite navigation system: transit system, navstar, gps, basic principles of
operation, signal structure of navstar broadcasts, data message, velocity
determination, accuracy of GPS & differential navigation, navstar receiver.
Recommended Books:
1. Richards, Mark. A (2014). Fundamentals of Radar Signal Processing.
New Delhi:TMH Publication.
2. Nagraja, N. S. (2009). Elements of Electronics Navigation: New
Delhi:TMH Publication.
3. Peebles Jr. P. Z. (1998). Radar Principles. New Delhi: Wiley
Publication.
Suggested E-Resources:
1. Introduction to Radar Systems by Dr. Robert O’Donnell,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-ll-001-introduction-to-radar-systems-
spring-2007

RS 401 Geoinformatics
Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Describe spatial database, Co-ordinate and projection system
• Analyse vector and raster based analysis in Geographical Information
Sciences
• Describe global cover based global position systems i.e. GPS,
GLONASS
231

• Describes applications of remote sensing and GIS in natural resources

management
Section A
Geographical Information System: Definition, Components of GIS,
Hardware and software requirements for GIS, Coordinate system and
projections, Database structure and formats, Spatial data models - raster and
vector. Data inputting, Data base design - editing and topology creation.
Linkage between spatial and Non spatial data, Query (Attribute/Spatial),
Vector based analysis. Raster based analysis. Errors, Digital Elevation
Model, Network analysis, O’pen source and WebGIS.
Section B
Remote Sensing: Definition - components of remote sensing - energy
sensor, interacting body; Type - active and passive remote sensing. Satellite
System - meteorological, communication and remote sensing. Platforms -
aerial and space, synoptivity and repeativity. Electromagnetic Radiation
(EMR) - EMR spectrum- visible, infrared [IR) middle IR, thermal IR and
microwave. EMR interaction with earth surface material, radiance,
irradiance, incident, reflected, absorbed and transmitted energy, spectral
response pattern - spectral signature curves (water, soil and vegetation].
Digital Image Processing : Digital Image, Satellite Image - characteristics
and formats. Resolution - spatial, spectral, radiometric and temporal;
Introduction to rectification, enhancement; Classification - Unsupervised
and Supervised classification.
Section C
Global Positioning System: Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS),
GPS, GLONASS, GALILEO, Segments - space, control, user, GPS
Satellite signals, sources of errors and corrections.
Applications of Remote Sensing and GIS:
Applications of GIS and Remote Sensing in resource management (forestry,
agriculture, urban telecommunication, transportation, water resources and
environment).
Recommended Books:
1. Chor, Pang. Lo.,&Albert, K. W. Yeung (2006). Concepts and
Techniques-of Geographic Information Systems. New Delhi: PHI
Publication.
232

2. Heywood, D.I., Cornelius, S. & Carver, S. (2009). An Introduction to

Geographical Information Systems. New Delhi: Pearson Publication.
3. Joseph, G. (2005). Fundamentals of remote sensing. Jaipur, Rajasthan:
Universities Press.
4. Jensen, John. R. (2015). Introductory Digital Image Processing: A
Remote Sensing Perspective. New Delhi: Pearson Publication.
5. Sabins, Floyd F. (2007). Remote Sensing: Principles and
Interpretation. Long Grove, Illinois: Waveland Press
Suggested e-resources:
1. Geoinformatics by University of Twente.
https://www.itc.nl/ilwis/applications-guide/
2. Geographical Information System by Dr A. K. Gosain, Indian
Institute of Technology, Delhi. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105102015/1

ELE 402 Audio and Video Systems

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
(CA: 40 + ESA: 60) 4 0 0 4

Learning Outcomes: After successful completion of the course, student

will be able to:
• Understand the fundamental concepts of television transmitter, receiver
systems and the transmission of video signals and importance of
television standards.
• Understand different colour television systems used worldwide and its
compatibility.
• Understand principles of recording and reproduction of disc and video
cassette recorders.
Section A
Audio Systems: Types of microphones and speakers, Monophonic,
stereophonic and quadraphonic audio systems.
Disc and Magnetic Recording and Reproduction : Monophonic and
stereophonic disc recording and reproducing systems, Magnetic recording ,
playback, Biasing & equalization, Recording medium, Magnetic heads-
233

replay & eraser heads, Audio cassettes, Tape speed, Maximum usable
frequency, Tape transport mechanism, Distortion & noise aspects, Hi-Fi
stereo system.
Section B
Video Cassette Recorders: Video recording requirements, Video tape
formats. Modulation-up conversion and down conversion of video signal,
Servo systems, Functional Block diagram of VCR: video recording &
playback.
Compact Disc Recording and Reproduction: advantages of Compact
disc, & its Specifications, CD player, optical recording, CD technology &
manufacturing, CDROM, CD video.
Section C
Video Cameras: Image conversion principle, Plumbicon, Sidicon camera
tubes, three tubes colored camera, Block diagram of color camera tube.
TV Engineering: Scanning process, Interlaced scanning, Composite video
signals, Principle of black & white TV, color TV, Primary colours,
Chrominance & luminance signals.
Recommended Books:
1. Bali, S.P.,&Bali, R. (2014). Audio Video Systems Principles, Practices,
and Troubleshooting. New Delhi: Khanna Book Publishing Co.
2. Sharma, Ajay. (1998). Audio and Video Systems. New Delhi: Dhanpat
Rai & Co.
3. Gupta, R.G. (2010). Audio and Video Systems: Principles,
Maintenance and Troubleshooting. New Delhi: Tata Mc-Graw Hill
Suggested e-resources:
1. Digital Video Signal Processing by Prof. Sumana Gupta, Department
of Electrical Engineering, IIT Kanpur.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104020/1
2. Audio System Engineering by Prof. Shyamal Kumar Das Mandal,
Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, Indian
Institute of Technology, Kharagpur.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117105133/22
234

Reading Electives
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
0 0 0 2

This course describe the systems that generate or consume electrical energy
can produce electromagnetic noise that may interfere with the operation of
the system itself and/or other systems. The course will enable students to
understand how the principles of electricity and magnetism can be applied
to design electrical and electronic systems that can co-exist harmoniously,
that is, to design systems that are electromagnetically compatible with each
other. The students will also be expected to explain how electromagnetic
disturbances are generated in systems, how they couple to other systems,
and how systems can be protected.
Suggested e-resource:
1. Electromagnetic Compatibility by Daniel Mansson, KTH Royal
Institute of Technology, Sweden
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_ee17/preview.

Electronic Packaging
Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
0 0 0 2

This course is designed to provide a basic knowledge of the technologies

and processes required for the packaging of electronic products. The focus
of the course will be on the mechanical, and materials aspects which are
often neglected in the design phase with potentially catastrophic
consequences. Students will be expected to explore the underlying scientific
and technological knowledge-based needed to become proficient builders
and users of electronic systems. The students will also be able to explain the
fundamental principles for packaging active and passive electronic devices;
design of components, circuit boards, connectors, and assemblies;
electromagnetic interference and its impact on packaging, thermal and
mechanical design; and reliability assessment methods.
235

Suggested e-resource:
1. Electronics Packaging and Manufacturing by IIT Kharagpur
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_me54.

Multimedia Compression and Communication

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
0 0 0 2

The purpose of this course is to understand the multimedia communication

and compression. In this course students will be expected to explore various
multimedia components and their characteristics, such as hardware,
animation and graphics and able to explain the various audio and video
compression techniques and apply these techniques in multimedia
communication. The student will also be able to develop the understanding
of network architecture, protocols, resource management, multimedia
operating systems, scheduling and policing mechanisms.
Suggested e-resource:
1. Multimedia Processing by IIT Kharagpur.
https://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/117105083/.

Professional Ethics
Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
0 0 0 2

The course is intended to provide participants with the ability to analyze

ethical situations, such as how they interact and what can be expected from
them as correct ethical behaviour. In turn, any professional will benefit
from a critical scrutiny of their own ethics by those from other professions.
The general principles of professional ethics will be examined, as well as
the distinctive problems of the different fields. The participant will also be
expected to explain the pertaining issues, such as professional codes of
ethics, confidentiality, obligations and Moral Values in Professional Ethics,
the limits of predictability and responsibilities of the engineering
profession, research misconduct, and work place rights & responsibilities.
236

Suggested e-resources:
1. Professional Ethics by Rochester Institute of Technology.
http://www.openculture.com/professional-ethics-a-free-online-course.
2. Ethical Practice: Leading Through Professionalism, Social
Responsibility, and System Design by Prof. Leigh Hafrey, MIT,
USA. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/sloan-school-of-management/15-
270-ethical-practice-leading-through-professionalism-social-
responsibility-and-system-design-spring-2016.

Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
0 0 0 2

The course is intended to develop the good understanding of the

fundamentals and application of telecommunication networks i.e. PSTN,
PDN and ISDN, modern digital telecommunication switching and
networks. The participants will be expected to explain the recent
terminology, like switching systems, traffic management, time division
switching systems, data communication Networks, routing, ISDN, voice
data integration and importance of telephone traffic analysis and telephone
networks.
Suggested e-resources:
1. Computer Networks by Department of CSE, IIT Kharagpur
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcoursecontents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Com
munication%20network/New_index1.html
2. Data Communication by IIT Kharagpur.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105082/19.

Electric Vehicles
Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
0 0 0 2

Electric vehicles are the future of transportation. Electric mobility has

become an essential part of the energy transition, and will imply significant
237

changes for vehicle manufacturers, governments, companies and

individuals. This course prepare the students for product development
positions in the automotive, communications, solar, wind turbine, and smart
grid industries and service positions in the automotive industry. This course
will be a first level course on electric vehicle. Students will be able to
understand the operation of battery driven electric vehicle. The course will
focus on areas that come under the umbrella of electric vehicles, such as
vehicle dynamics, Motors, Power Electronics, Batteries, Charging and etc.
Students will explore the most important aspects of this new market,
including state-of-the-art technology of electric vehicles and charging
infrastructure.
Suggested e-resources:
1. Electric Vehicles Part 1 by IIT Delhi.
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_ee18/preview.
2. Electric Cars: Introduction by Delft University of Technology (TU
Delft). https://www.edx.org/course/electric-cars-introduction-0.

IoT Sensors and Devices

Max. Marks : 100 L T P C
0 0 0 2

This course is for practical learners who want to explore and interact with
the IoT Bridge between the cyber- and physical world. Student will learn
about the ‘things’ that get connected in the Internet of Things to sense and
interact with the real world environment – from something as simple as a
smoke detector to a robotic arm in manufacturing. This course is about the
devices that feel and the devices that respond. The course also describe
about IoT sensors, actuators and intermediary devices that connect things to
the internet, as well as electronics and systems, both of which underpin how
the Internet of Things works and what it is designed to do.
Suggested e-resources:
1. IoT Sensors and Devices by Curtin University.
https://www.edx.org/course/sensors-and-devices-in-the-iot.
238

2. Internet of Things: Sensing and Actuation by University of

California San Diego https://www.coursera.org/learn/internet-of-
things-sensing-actuation.

Reading Electives and Their Source Institution:

Reading Electives Source Institution

Introduction to Photonics NPTEL
Fundamentals of Semiconductor devices NPTEL
Advanced IOT Applications NPTEL
Principles of Signals and Systems NPTEL
Biomedical Signal Processing NPTEL
Electromagnetic Waves in guided and wireless
NPTEL
media
Control Engineering Swayam
Industrial Automation and Control Swayam
Mathematical Methods and techniques in signal
NPTEL
processing
Electronics Modules for Industrial Applications
NPTEL
using Opamps
Chemical Process Instrumentation NPTEL
National Sugar
Quality Control
Institute
Interfacing with Arduino Coursera
Robotica Coursera
Analyzing Data with Python Edx
Industry 4.0 Edx
Internet of Things MSME
Industrial Robotics MSME
239

SCADA MSME
PLC MSME
Electromagnetic Compatibility NPTEL
Antennas NPTEL
Computer Aided Power System Analysis NPTEL
Power System Dynamics, Control and Monitoring NPTEL
Advance Power Electronics and Control NPTEL
Advances in UHV Transmission & Distribution NPTEL
Electronics Modules for industrial applications using
NPTEL
OPAMP
CNC Machining Turning MSME
AUTOCAD MSME
Solar PV Technology MSME

Question Bank in Electronics and Communication Engineering
No ratings yet
Question Bank in Electronics and Communication Engineering
1 page
IES Books From Made Easy
No ratings yet
IES Books From Made Easy
18 pages
Wiring Compatibility
No ratings yet
Wiring Compatibility
8 pages
MCQ For Gate Ece by RK Kanodia Archives - Free PDF Books
No ratings yet
MCQ For Gate Ece by RK Kanodia Archives - Free PDF Books
3 pages
RRB Alp CBT 1 Previous Year Question Paper 15671
No ratings yet
RRB Alp CBT 1 Previous Year Question Paper 15671
51 pages
Gate Ece
No ratings yet
Gate Ece
25 pages
Arihant Computer General Awareness English
No ratings yet
Arihant Computer General Awareness English
186 pages
Modern Indian Political Thought - Bidyut
No ratings yet
Modern Indian Political Thought - Bidyut
474 pages
MD Electronics (Introducation To Electronics)
0% (1)
MD Electronics (Introducation To Electronics)
31 pages
TSPSC Group I Prelims 4100 PYQs Key
No ratings yet
TSPSC Group I Prelims 4100 PYQs Key
436 pages
Text Books Gate Ece
No ratings yet
Text Books Gate Ece
4 pages
100 Physics One Liner For WBCS 2020
No ratings yet
100 Physics One Liner For WBCS 2020
2 pages
Objective of GS
No ratings yet
Objective of GS
492 pages
Aptitude Test Paper-2 Cracking IAS General Studies Prelims-Disha
No ratings yet
Aptitude Test Paper-2 Cracking IAS General Studies Prelims-Disha
122 pages
General Awareness
No ratings yet
General Awareness
111 pages
Economy Rau'sIAS Prelims Compass PDF
100% (1)
Economy Rau'sIAS Prelims Compass PDF
130 pages
Expected Modern Indian History Part 2 Questions For Railway SSC and Upsc Exams - PDF Download
No ratings yet
Expected Modern Indian History Part 2 Questions For Railway SSC and Upsc Exams - PDF Download
27 pages
2002 - UPSC Indian History (Preliminary) Optional Paper With Solution
No ratings yet
2002 - UPSC Indian History (Preliminary) Optional Paper With Solution
6 pages
Cyber Commando Entranc Test Syllabus New
No ratings yet
Cyber Commando Entranc Test Syllabus New
2 pages
WBPSC Clerkship Syllabus - 2023 PDF
No ratings yet
WBPSC Clerkship Syllabus - 2023 PDF
39 pages
National & International Dates For IAS Exam
No ratings yet
National & International Dates For IAS Exam
9 pages
General Science Chemistry MCQs - GKToday
No ratings yet
General Science Chemistry MCQs - GKToday
6 pages
Important Battles in Indian History Upsc Notes 93
No ratings yet
Important Battles in Indian History Upsc Notes 93
4 pages
RPF SI 2024 ALL 15 Shift English
No ratings yet
RPF SI 2024 ALL 15 Shift English
301 pages
Maths by RK Kanodia
0% (2)
Maths by RK Kanodia
3 pages
RRB NTPC Syllabus 2020 - General Awareness
No ratings yet
RRB NTPC Syllabus 2020 - General Awareness
1 page
SSC 2024 Science (English)
No ratings yet
SSC 2024 Science (English)
78 pages
Nagaland Basic Facts 2023
No ratings yet
Nagaland Basic Facts 2023
272 pages
Untitled
No ratings yet
Untitled
669 pages
General Science & Technology General Studies
No ratings yet
General Science & Technology General Studies
406 pages
Computer Awareness
No ratings yet
Computer Awareness
64 pages
CSAT General Mental Ability
No ratings yet
CSAT General Mental Ability
10 pages
Jnanpith Award Winners
No ratings yet
Jnanpith Award Winners
3 pages
Do You Know
50% (4)
Do You Know
142 pages
GS DRISHTI GH CHAKRA GEOGRAPHY
No ratings yet
GS DRISHTI GH CHAKRA GEOGRAPHY
128 pages
CAPF Assistant Commandant Answer Key Download SET A B C D of Paper 1 and Paper 2 WWW - Upsc.gov - in - WeeklyExam
100% (1)
CAPF Assistant Commandant Answer Key Download SET A B C D of Paper 1 and Paper 2 WWW - Upsc.gov - in - WeeklyExam
4 pages
GK Blaster SSC Railway Exams March Mont 2018 English - pdf-63
0% (2)
GK Blaster SSC Railway Exams March Mont 2018 English - pdf-63
271 pages
Previously Asked Questions in SSC CGL - History, Polity & Geography
No ratings yet
Previously Asked Questions in SSC CGL - History, Polity & Geography
9 pages
Wifi Based Digital Notice Board
No ratings yet
Wifi Based Digital Notice Board
63 pages
KSG 10000 Part 1
No ratings yet
KSG 10000 Part 1
318 pages
My Tryinig Ripot Is Redy
No ratings yet
My Tryinig Ripot Is Redy
43 pages
Basic Computer Knowledge 14.10.2023
No ratings yet
Basic Computer Knowledge 14.10.2023
29 pages
BPSC Exam: Previous Years Question Paper
No ratings yet
BPSC Exam: Previous Years Question Paper
76 pages
3. S&T PYQ CONTENT
No ratings yet
3. S&T PYQ CONTENT
10 pages
Made Easy Current Affairs Annual Edition 2024
No ratings yet
Made Easy Current Affairs Annual Edition 2024
151 pages
Sociology Final
No ratings yet
Sociology Final
781 pages
GATE Electrical Solved Paper
No ratings yet
GATE Electrical Solved Paper
16 pages
UNGIST - CSAT Clock & Calendar - PYQs (2011-2022)
No ratings yet
UNGIST - CSAT Clock & Calendar - PYQs (2011-2022)
7 pages
ECE Project Final Documents
No ratings yet
ECE Project Final Documents
90 pages
70th BPSC Prelims and Mains Detail - 231224 - 184249
No ratings yet
70th BPSC Prelims and Mains Detail - 231224 - 184249
17 pages
1st April 2019
No ratings yet
1st April 2019
50 pages
Csat Pyq Solved - (2011-2022) - Final Updated
No ratings yet
Csat Pyq Solved - (2011-2022) - Final Updated
258 pages
Classical and Folk Dance
No ratings yet
Classical and Folk Dance
3 pages
RRB NTPC CBT-1 Question Paper 26th April All Shift (English)
No ratings yet
RRB NTPC CBT-1 Question Paper 26th April All Shift (English)
24 pages
Book 1
No ratings yet
Book 1
13 pages
CS Subjects Gate Overflow
No ratings yet
CS Subjects Gate Overflow
668 pages
Beyond the Barracks
From Everand
Beyond the Barracks
Nelson Baker
No ratings yet
SSC CGL Preparatory Guide -Mathematics (Part 2)
From Everand
SSC CGL Preparatory Guide -Mathematics (Part 2)
Dr. DK Sukhani
4/5 (1)
Kht Bklwryws Lktrwnyt Sny Wthkm
No ratings yet
Kht Bklwryws Lktrwnyt Sny Wthkm
78 pages
Electronics & Communication Engineering: Model Curriculum
No ratings yet
Electronics & Communication Engineering: Model Curriculum
62 pages
R17 Syllabus
No ratings yet
R17 Syllabus
308 pages
Media & Resources - Unique Identification Authority of India - Government of India
No ratings yet
Media & Resources - Unique Identification Authority of India - Government of India
4 pages
Myaadhaar - Unique Identification Authority of India - Government of India
No ratings yet
Myaadhaar - Unique Identification Authority of India - Government of India
2 pages
RASFF - Food and Feed Safety Alerts
No ratings yet
RASFF - Food and Feed Safety Alerts
3 pages
Canadian Space Agency - Wikipedia
No ratings yet
Canadian Space Agency - Wikipedia
16 pages
RASF - Unique Identification Authority of India - Government of India
No ratings yet
RASF - Unique Identification Authority of India - Government of India
4 pages
HP / Compaq 1400 Series
No ratings yet
HP / Compaq 1400 Series
131 pages
Exit Exam Tutarials For Fundamental of Electrical Engineering
No ratings yet
Exit Exam Tutarials For Fundamental of Electrical Engineering
85 pages
PW 4 Half Wave Rectifier
No ratings yet
PW 4 Half Wave Rectifier
10 pages
2209 Manual
No ratings yet
2209 Manual
79 pages
Ioc DT P 2004 22
No ratings yet
Ioc DT P 2004 22
14 pages
Organic Device Simulation Using Silvaco Software
No ratings yet
Organic Device Simulation Using Silvaco Software
32 pages
HF Static Transceivers As Per MHA QR (Version 2.0)
No ratings yet
HF Static Transceivers As Per MHA QR (Version 2.0)
11 pages
UC3842/UC3843/UC3844/UC3845: SMPS Controller
No ratings yet
UC3842/UC3843/UC3844/UC3845: SMPS Controller
12 pages
Acer Aspire One d150 - Compal La-4781p - Rev 1.0
No ratings yet
Acer Aspire One d150 - Compal La-4781p - Rev 1.0
40 pages
Triple-Band Combiner: 380 - 960 MHZ 1710 - 1880 MHZ 1920 - 2170 MHZ
No ratings yet
Triple-Band Combiner: 380 - 960 MHZ 1710 - 1880 MHZ 1920 - 2170 MHZ
4 pages
Spek ECG 12 Channel
No ratings yet
Spek ECG 12 Channel
1 page
Lecture Introduction To Smith Charts
No ratings yet
Lecture Introduction To Smith Charts
19 pages
SRM Institute of Science & Technology - Academic Curricula (2019 Part Time Regulations) 37
No ratings yet
SRM Institute of Science & Technology - Academic Curricula (2019 Part Time Regulations) 37
2 pages
Airmaster - S1 (Controller - Software For Positive Displacement Compressor) Factsheet
No ratings yet
Airmaster - S1 (Controller - Software For Positive Displacement Compressor) Factsheet
2 pages
DDR Sdram - Wikipedia
No ratings yet
DDR Sdram - Wikipedia
40 pages
Work STAGE2412 - 4824 - MANUAL5 - V1
No ratings yet
Work STAGE2412 - 4824 - MANUAL5 - V1
16 pages
Ece IV Microcontrollers (10es42) Assignment
No ratings yet
Ece IV Microcontrollers (10es42) Assignment
3 pages
Panasonic Plasma TV TH42PX77U
No ratings yet
Panasonic Plasma TV TH42PX77U
58 pages
Anna University Trichy B.Tech Information Technology Syllabus
No ratings yet
Anna University Trichy B.Tech Information Technology Syllabus
84 pages
6.51-56 SSM
No ratings yet
6.51-56 SSM
6 pages
Principles of Management Unit I Introduction To Management and Organizations 9 Unit V Controlling 9
No ratings yet
Principles of Management Unit I Introduction To Management and Organizations 9 Unit V Controlling 9
7 pages
Microzed Ac2speed Wiring
100% (1)
Microzed Ac2speed Wiring
7 pages
Eeu 201 Electric Circuit Theory
No ratings yet
Eeu 201 Electric Circuit Theory
2 pages
Yorkville Ap2020 Power Amplifier Service Manual
No ratings yet
Yorkville Ap2020 Power Amplifier Service Manual
10 pages
PT5300 Master Sync Generator: Guide To Installation and Operation
No ratings yet
PT5300 Master Sync Generator: Guide To Installation and Operation
90 pages
Electrical Practical 3
No ratings yet
Electrical Practical 3
7 pages
Sony Vaio VPC-M Series PCG-21313M (Foxconn M9F1) PDF
No ratings yet
Sony Vaio VPC-M Series PCG-21313M (Foxconn M9F1) PDF
46 pages
Notes 15 3317 Plane Waves
No ratings yet
Notes 15 3317 Plane Waves
37 pages
Marantz 2245 Owner's Manual
No ratings yet
Marantz 2245 Owner's Manual
28 pages